identification of nonlinear systems using polynomial ... · 2.4.1 response to a sine wave 25 2.4.2...
TRANSCRIPT
![Page 1: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/1.jpg)
Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Models
FACULTY OF ENGINEERINGDepartment of Fundamental Electricity and Instrumentation
Thesis submitted in fulfillment of the requirements for the degree of Doctor in de Ingenieurswetenschappen (Doctor in Engineering) by
ir. Johan Paduart
Chair: Prof. Dr. ir. Annick Hubin (Vrije Universiteit Brussel)
Vice chair: Prof. Dr. ir. Jean Vereecken (Vrije Universiteit Brussel)
Secretary: Prof. Dr. Steve Vanlanduit (Vrije Universiteit Brussel)
Advisers: Prof. Dr. ir. Johan Schoukens (Vrije Universiteit Brussel)Prof. Dr. ir. Rik Pintelon (Vrije Universiteit Brussel)
Jury: Prof. Dr. ir. Lennart Ljung (Linköping University)Prof. Dr. ir. Johan Suykens (Katholieke Universiteit Leuven)Prof. Dr. ir. Jan Swevers (Katholieke Universiteit Leuven)Prof. Dr. ir. Yves Rolain (Vrije Universiteit Brussel)
![Page 2: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/2.jpg)
Print: Grafikon, Oostkamp
© Vrije Universiteit Brussel - ELEC Department© Johan Paduart
2007 Uitgeverij VUBPRESS Brussels University PressVUBPRESS is an imprint of ASP nv (Academic and Scientific Publishers nv)Ravensteingalerij 28B-1000 BrusselsTel. ++32 (0)2 289 26 50Fax ++32 (0)2 289 26 59E-mail: [email protected]
ISBN 978 90 5487 468 3NUR 910Legal deposit D/2008/11.161/012
All rights reserved. No parts of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any formor by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, withoutthe prior written permission of the author or the ELEC Department of the VrijeUniversiteit Brussel.
![Page 3: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/3.jpg)
Leaving the calm water of the linear sea
for the more unpredictable waves of the nonlinear ocean.
![Page 4: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/4.jpg)
![Page 5: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/5.jpg)
Acknowledgements
Research and writing a PhD thesis is not something one can do all by himself. Therefore, I
would like to thank everyone who contributed to this thesis in one or many ways.
First of all, I am grateful to Johan Schoukens and Rik Pintelon for giving me the opportunity to
pursue my PhD degree at the ELEC department, and for introducing me to this fascinating
research field. Without the guidance of the ‘patjes’ (Jojo, Rik and Yves) over the past four
years, this work would have been a much tougher job.
I would also like to thank all my colleagues at the ELEC department for the stimulating work
environment, the exchange of interesting ideas, and the relaxing talks.
I am indebted to Lieve Lauwers, Rik Pintelon, Johan Schoukens, and Wendy Van Moer for
proofreading (parts of) my thesis. A special word of thanks goes to Lieve, who has polished
the rough edges of this text. Lieve, you have made my thesis much more pleasant to read.
Furthermore, I thank Tom Coen, Thomas Delwiche, Liesbeth Gommé, and Kris Smolders for
letting me use their measurements. I very much appreciate your difficult and time-consuming
experimental work.
Last but not least, I am grateful to my family and my lieve Lieve for their unconditional
support and love.
Johan Paduart
![Page 6: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/6.jpg)
![Page 7: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/7.jpg)
i
Table of Contents
Operators and Notational Conventions vSymbols viiAbbreviations ix
Chapter 1Introduction 1
1.1 What are Nonlinear Systems? 21.2 Why build Nonlinear Models? 31.3 A Framework for Nonlinear Modelling 4
1.3.1 Approximation Criteria 41.3.2 The Volterra-Wiener Theory 41.3.3 Continuous-time versus Discrete-time 71.3.4 Single Input, Single Output versus Multiple Input, Multiple Output 71.3.5 What is not included in the Volterra Framework? 8
1.4 Outline of the thesis 101.5 Contributions 121.6 Publication List 13
Chapter 2The Best Linear Approximation 15
2.1 Introduction 162.2 Class of Excitation Signals 18
2.2.1 Random Phase Multisine 182.2.2 Gaussian Noise 20
2.3 Properties of the Best Linear Approximation 212.3.1 Single Input, Single Output Systems 212.3.2 Multiple Input, Multiple Output Systems 22
2.4 Some Properties of Nonlinear Systems 252.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 252.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 252.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for Nonlinearities 26
2.5 Estimating the Best Linear Approximation 282.5.1 Single Input, Single Output Systems 282.5.2 Multiple Input, Multiple Output Systems 34
Appendix 2.A Calculation of the FRF Covariance from the Input/Output Covariances 40Appendix 2.B Covariance of the FRF for Non Periodic Data 43
Chapter 3Fast Measurement of Quantization Distortions 47
3.1 Introduction 483.2 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for Non-idealities 493.3 DSP Errors 50
3.3.1 Truncation Errors of the Filter Coefficients 51
![Page 8: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/8.jpg)
ii
3.3.2 Finite Precision Distortion 533.3.3 Finite Range Distortion 553.3.4 Influence of the Implementation 57
3.4 Quality Analysis of Audio Codecs 593.5 Conclusion 62
Chapter 4Identification of Nonlinear Feedback Systems 63
4.1 Introduction 644.2 Model Structure 654.3 Estimation Procedure 68
4.3.1 Best Linear Approximation 684.3.2 Nonlinear Feedback 684.3.3 Nonlinear Optimization 70
4.4 Experimental Results 724.4.1 Linear Model 734.4.2 Estimation of the Nonlinear Feedback Coefficients 754.4.3 Nonlinear Optimization 764.4.4 Upsampling 76
4.5 Conclusion 79Appendix 4.A Analytic Expressions for the Jacobian 80
Chapter 5Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems 81
5.1 Introduction 825.2 The Quest for a Good Model Structure 83
5.2.1 Volterra Models 835.2.2 NARX Approach 845.2.3 State Space Models 86
5.3 Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Models 925.3.1 Multinomial Expansion Theorem 925.3.2 Graded Lexicographic Order 945.3.3 Approximation Behaviour 945.3.4 Stability 985.3.5 Some Remarks on the Polynomial Approach 99
5.4 On the Equivalence with some Block-oriented Models 1025.4.1 Hammerstein 1025.4.2 Wiener 1045.4.3 Wiener-Hammerstein 1055.4.4 Nonlinear Feedback 1065.4.5 Conclusion 109
5.5 A Step beyond the Volterra Framework 1115.5.1 Duffing Oscillator 1115.5.2 Lorenz Attractor 113
5.6 Identification of the PNLSS Model 1155.6.1 Best Linear Approximation 1155.6.2 Frequency Domain Subspace Identification 1155.6.3 Nonlinear Optimization of the Linear Model 1205.6.4 Estimation of the Full Nonlinear Model 122
Appendix 5.A Some Combinatorials 130
![Page 9: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/9.jpg)
iii
Appendix 5.B Construction of the Subspace Weighting Matrix from the FRF Covariance 131Appendix 5.C Nonlinear Optimization Methods 133Appendix 5.D Explicit Expressions for the PNLSS Jacobian 140Appendix 5.E Computation of the Jacobian regarded as an alternative PNLSS system 142
Chapter 6Applications of the Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Model 145
6.1 Silverbox 1466.1.1 Description of the DUT 1466.1.2 Description of the Experiments 1466.1.3 Best Linear Approximation 1476.1.4 Nonlinear Model 1496.1.5 Comparison with Other Approaches 151
6.2 Combine Harvester 1556.2.1 Description of the DUT 1556.2.2 Description of the Experiments 1566.2.3 Best Linear Approximation 1566.2.4 Nonlinear Model 158
6.3 Semi-active Damper 1616.3.1 Description of the DUT 1616.3.2 Description of the Experiments 1616.3.3 Best Linear Approximation 1626.3.4 Nonlinear Model 164
6.4 Quarter Car Set-up 1676.4.1 Description of the DUT 1676.4.2 Description of the Experiments 1676.4.3 Best Linear Approximation 1696.4.4 Nonlinear Model 170
6.5 Robot Arm 1736.5.1 Description of the DUT 1736.5.2 Description of the Experiments 1746.5.3 Best Linear Approximation 1756.5.4 Nonlinear Model 176
6.6 Wiener-Hammerstein 1796.6.1 Description of the DUT 1796.6.2 Description of the Experiments 1796.6.3 Level of Nonlinear Distortions 1796.6.4 Best Linear Approximation 1806.6.5 Nonlinear Model 1826.6.6 Comparison with a Block-oriented Approach 185
6.7 Crystal Detector 1866.7.1 Description of the DUT 1866.7.2 Description of the Experiments 1866.7.3 Best Linear Approximation 1876.7.4 Nonlinear Model 1886.7.5 Comparison with a Block-oriented Approach 192
![Page 10: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/10.jpg)
iv
Chapter 7Conclusions 193
References 197
Publication List 204
![Page 11: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/11.jpg)
v
Operators and Notational Conventions
outline upper case font denotes a set: for example, , , ,
and are, respectively, the natural, the integer, the real, andthe complex numbers.
the Kronecker matrix product
real part of
imaginary part of
the minimizing argument of
an arbitrary function with the property
estimated value of
complex conjugate of
subscript
superscript
subscript with respect to the input of the system
subscript with respect to the output of the system
vector which contains all the distinct nonlinear combinations of
the elements of vector , of exactly degree
vector which contains all the distinct nonlinear combinations of
the elements of vector , from degree 2 up to
superscript matrix transpose
superscript transpose of the inverse matrix
superscript Hermitian transpose: complex conjugate transpose of a matrix
superscript Hermitian transpose of the inverse matrix
superscript Moore-Penrose pseudo-inverse
phase (argument) of the complex number
-th column of
-th row of
condition number of an matrix
magnitude of a complex number
� � � �
�
⊗Re ( )
Im ( )
f x( )x
arg min f x( )
O x( ) O x( )x
-----------x 0→lim ∞<
θ θx x
re AreRe A( )
Im A( )=
re AreRe A( ) Im A( )=
u
y
x r( )
x r
x r{ }
x r
T
T–
H
H–
+
x∠ x
A : j,[ ] j A
A i :,[ ] i A
κ A( ) σi A( )i
max( ) σi A( )i
min( )⁄= n m× A
x Re x( )( )2 Im x( )( )2+= x
![Page 12: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/12.jpg)
vi
block diagonal matrix with blocks with
Hermitian symmetric part of an matrix
rank of the matrix , i.e., maximum number of linear
independent rows (columns) of
a column vector formed by stacking the columns of the matrix
on top of each other
mathematical expectation
cross-covariance matrix of and
variance of
covariance matrix of
sample covariance matrix of
cross-covariance matrix of and
sample cross-covariance matrix of and
Discrete Fourier Transform of the samples ,
identity matrix
zero matrix
identity matrix
auto-power spectrum of
cross-power spectrum of and
sample mean of
mean value of
variance of
sample variance of
covariance of and
sample covariance of and
diag A1 A2 … AK, , ,( ) Ak k 1 2 … K, , ,=
herm A( ) A AH+( ) 2⁄= n m× A
rank A( ) n m× A
A
vec A( )
A
�{ }Cov X Y,( ) X Y
var x( ) x
CX Cov X( ) Cov X X,( )= = X
CX X
CXY Cov X Y,( )= X Y
CXY X Y
DFT x t( )( ) x t( )
t 0 1 … N 1–, , ,=
Im m m×
0m n×
m n×Im m m×
SXX jω( ) x t( )
SXY jω( ) x t( ) y t( )
X X
µx � x{ }= x
σx2 var x( )= x
σx2 x
σxy2 covar x y,( )= x y
σxy2 x y
![Page 13: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/13.jpg)
vii
Symbols
total covariance of the Best Linear Approximation (MIMO)
covariance of the BLA due to the measurement noise (MIMO)
covariance of the BLA due to the stochastic nonlinear
contributions (MIMO)
frequency
number of frequency domain data samples
sampling frequency
frequency response function
best linear approximation of a nonlinear plant
frequency index
number of (repeated) experiments
number of time domain data samples
, , and state dimension, input dimension, and output dimension
dimension of the parameter vector
Laplace transform variable
Laplace transform variable evaluated along the imaginary axis at
DFT frequency :
continuous- or discrete-time variable
sampling period
discrete Fourier transform of the samples and ,
Fourier coefficients of the periodic signals ,
Fourier transform of and
input and output time signals
cost function based on measurements
Z-transform variable
Z-transform variable evaluated along the unit circle at DFT
frequency :
CBLA k( )
Cn k( )
CNL k( )
f
F
fs
G jω( )
GBLA jω( )
j j2 1–=
k
M
N
na nu ny
nθ θ
s
sk
k sk jωk=
t
Ts
U k( ) Y k( ), u tTs( ) y tTs( )
t 0 1 … N 1–, , ,=
Uk Yk, u t( ) y t( )
U jω( ) Y jω( ), u t( ) y t( )
u t( ) y t( ),VF θ z,( ) F
z
zk
k zk ejωkTs ej2πk N⁄= =
![Page 14: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/14.jpg)
viii
column vector of the model residuals (dimension )
gradient of residuals w.r.t. the parameters
(dimension )
column vector of the model parameters
nonlinear vector map of the state equation
nonlinear vector map of the output equation
column vector that contains the stacked state and input vectors
total variance of the Best Linear Approximation (SISO)
variance of the BLA due to the measurement noise (SISO)
variance of the BLA due to the stochastic nonlinear contributions
(SISO)
angular frequency
ε θ Z,( ) F
J θ Z,( ) ε θ Z,( )∂ θ∂⁄= ε θ Z,( ) θF nθ×
θζ t( )η t( )ξ t( )
σBLA2 k( )
σn2 k( )
σNL2 k( )
ω 2πf=
![Page 15: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/15.jpg)
ix
Abbreviations
BL Band-Limited (measurement set-up)BLA Best Linear ApproximationDFT Discrete Fourier TransformDUT Device Under TestFIR Finite Impulse ResponseFFT Fast Fourier TransformFRF Frequency Response FunctionGN Gaussian Noiseiid independent identically distributedIIR Infinite Impulse ResponseLS Least SquaresLTI Linear Time InvariantMIMO Multiple Input Multiple OutputMISO Multiple Input Single OutputNARX Nonlinear Auto Regressive with eXternal input (model)NLS Nonlinear Least SquaresNOE Nonlinear Output Error (model)pdf probability density functionPID Proportional-Integral-Derivative (controller)PISPOT Periodic Input, Same Periodic OuTputPNLSS Polynomial NonLinear State SpacePSD Power Spectral DensityRF Radio FrequencyRBF Radial Basis FunctionRMS Root Mean Square (value)RMSE Root Mean Square Errorrpm rotations per minuteRPM Random Phase MultisineSA State Affine (model)SISO Single Input Single OutputSDR Signal-to-Distortion RatioSNR Signal-to-Noise RatioSVD Singular Value Decompositionw.p.1 with probability oneWLS Weighted Least Squares
![Page 16: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/16.jpg)
x
![Page 17: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/17.jpg)
1
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
![Page 18: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/18.jpg)
Chapter 1: Introduction
2
1.1 What are Nonlinear Systems?
It is difficult, if not impossible, to give a closing definition of nonlinear systems. The famous
paradigm by the mathematician Stan Ulam illustrates this [6]: “using a term like ‘nonlinear
science’, is like referring to the bulk of zoology as the study of non-elephant animals”.
Nevertheless, the world around us is filled with nonlinear phenomena, and we are very
familiar with some of these effects. Essentially, a system is nonlinear when the rule of three is
not applicable to its behaviour. Tax rating systems in Belgium, for instance, behave
nonlinearly: the higher someone’s gross salary gets, the higher his/her average tax rate
becomes. Audio amplifiers are another good example of nonlinear systems. When their
volume is turned up too eagerly, the signals they produce get clipped, and the music we hear
becomes distorted instead of sounding louder. The weather system also behaves nonlinearly:
slight perturbations of this system can lead to massive modifications after a long period of
time. This is the so-called butterfly effect. It explains why it is so hard to accurately predict
the weather with a time horizon of more than a couple of days. In some situations, nonlinear
behaviour is a desired effect. Video and audio broadcasting, mobile telephony, and CMOS
technology would simply be impossible without nonlinear devices such as transistors and
mixers. Hence, it is important to understand and model their behaviour.
Finally, let us define, in a slightly more rigorous way, what nonlinear systems are. To this end,
we start by defining a linear system. With zero initial conditions, the system is linear if it
obeys the superposition principle and the scaling property
, (1-1)
where and are two arbitrary input signals as a function of time, and and are
two arbitrary scalar numbers. When the superposition principle or the scaling property is not
fulfilled, we call a nonlinear system. The most important implication of this open
definition, is that there exists no general nonlinear framework. That is why studying nonlinear
systems is such a difficult task.
T .{ }
T αu1 t( ) βu2 t( )+{ } αT u1 t( ){ } βT u2 t( ){ }+=
u1 t( ) u2 t( ) α β
T .{ }
![Page 19: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/19.jpg)
Why build Nonlinear Models?
3
1.2 Why build Nonlinear Models?
From the handful examples listed in the previous section, it is clear that many real-life
phenomena are nonlinear. Often, it is possible to use linear models to approximate their
behaviour. This is an attractive idea because the linear framework is well established.
Furthermore, linear models are easy to interpret and to understand. Building linear models
usually requires significantly less effort than the estimation of nonlinear models.
Unfortunately, linear approximations are only valid for a given input range. Hence, there has
been a tendency towards nonlinear modelling in various application fields during the last
decades. Technological innovations have resulted in less limitations on the computational, the
memory, and the data-acquisition level, making nonlinear modelling a more feasible option. In
order to build models for the studied nonlinear devices, we will employ system identification
methods. Classic text books about system identification are [75], [38], and [56]. The basic
goal of system identification is to identify mathematical models from the available input/
output data. This is often achieved via the minimization of a cost function embedded in a
statistical framework (Figure 1-1). An excellent starting point for nonlinear modelling is [70].
Other reference works on nonlinear systems and nonlinear modelling include
[60],[59],[7],[5],[33],[77], and [80].
In this thesis, we focus on the estimation of so-called simulation models: from measured
input/output data, we estimate a model that, given a new input data set, simulates the output
as good as possible. Such models can for instance be used to replace expensive experiments
by cheap computer simulations. The major difference with prediction error modelling is that
no past measured outputs are used to predict new output values.
As mentioned before, there is no general nonlinear framework. However, there exists a class
of nonlinear systems that has intensively been studied in the past, and which covers a broad
spectrum of ‘nice’ nonlinear behaviour: the class of Wiener systems. This class will be used as
a starting point in this thesis; it stems from the Volterra-Wiener theory which will be briefly
explained in what follows.
data modelcost function
Figure 1-1. Basic idea of system identification: the cost function relates data and model.
![Page 20: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/20.jpg)
Chapter 1: Introduction
4
1.3 A Framework for Nonlinear Modelling
1.3.1 Approximation Criteria
In this thesis, we will use models to approximate the behaviour of nonlinear systems. This
requires an approximation quality measure. For this, two principal convergence criteria can be
employed: convergence in mean square sense and uniform convergence.
Definition 1.1 (Convergence in the Mean) The model converges in mean
square sense to a system , if for all , independent of such that for all
,
with ,
where the expected value is taken over the class of excitation signals .
Definition 1.2 (Uniform Convergence) The model converges uniformly to a
system , if for all , independent of and such that for all ,
with .
Note that uniform convergence is a stronger result than convergence in mean square sense,
but the latter is often easier to obtain.
1.3.2 The Volterra-Wiener Theory
In order to set up a rigorous framework for the following chapter, we consider a particular
class of nonlinear systems. A classical approach is to make use of the Volterra-Wiener theory,
which is thoroughly described in [59] and [60]. A short overview of the results that will serve
in the rest of this thesis is given here.
f u θ,( )
f u( ) ε 0> Mε∃ θ
M Mε>
θM∃ u �∈∀⇒ : f u( ) f u θM,( )–2
⎩ ⎭⎨ ⎬⎧ ⎫
� ε< M dim θ( )=
�
f u θ,( )
f u( ) ε 0> Mε∃ θ u M Mε>
θM∃ u �∈∀⇒ : f u( ) f u θM,( )– ε< M dim θ( )=
![Page 21: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/21.jpg)
A Framework for Nonlinear Modelling
5
Volterra series can be seen as the dynamic extension of power series, and they are defined as
the (infinite) sum of Volterra operators . For an input as a function of time, the
output of the series is given by
. (1-2)
The -th order continuous-time Volterra operator is defined as
, (1-3)
where is the -th order Volterra kernel. For a first order system ( ),
equation (1-3) reduces to the well-known relation
, (1-4)
which is the convolution representation of a linear system with an impulse response .
When the kernel is causal, it is zero for any negative argument:
(1-5)
Because we restrict ourselves to causal systems, the lower integral limits in (1-3) and (1-4)
are set equal to zero. Volterra series can be used to approximate the behaviour of a certain
class of nonlinear systems. However, they can suffer from severe convergence problems,
which is a common phenomenon for power series. This can occur for example in the presence
of discontinuities like hard clipping or dead-zones. To overcome this difficulty, Wiener
introduced the Wiener-G functionals [60], which are Volterra functionals orthogonalized with
respect to white Gaussian input signals. Note that the Wiener-G functionals are only required
to solve numerical issues. Hence, what follows holds for both Volterra and Wiener-G
functionals. The Wiener theory states that any nonlinear system satisfying a number of
conditions can be represented arbitrarily well in mean square sense by Volterra/Wiener-G
functionals. The restrictions on system are [60]:
Hn u t( )
y t( )
y t( ) Hn u t( )[ ]
n 1=
∞
∑=
n Hn
Hn u t( )[ ] … hn τ1 … τn, ,( )u t τ1–( )…u t τn–( ) τ1… τndd
0
∞
∫0
∞
∫=
hn τ1 … τn, ,( ) n n 1=
H1 u t( )[ ] h τ( )u t τ–( ) τd
0
∞
∫=
h τ( )
hn
hn τ1 … τn, ,( ) 0= for τi 0, < i 1 … n, ,=
f
f
![Page 22: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/22.jpg)
Chapter 1: Introduction
6
1. is not explosive, in other words, the system’s response to a bounded input
sequence is finite;
2. has a finite memory, i.e., the present output becomes asymptotically independent
of the past values of the input;
3. is causal and time-invariant.
The set of systems satisfying these conditions is known as the class of Wiener systems.
When approximating by a Volterra/Wiener-G functional , the mean square convergence is
guaranteed over a finite time interval, with respect to the class of white Gaussian input signals
:
(1-6)
Boyd and Chua achieved even more powerful results with Volterra series via the introduction
of a concept called Fading Memory [5].
Definition 1.3 (Fading Memory) has Fading Memory on a subset of a compact
set, if there is a decreasing function : , with , such that
for each and there is a such that for all :
(1-7)
Loosely explained, an operator has Fading Memory when two input signals close to each other
in the recent past, but not necessarily in the remote past, yield present output signals that are
close. This strengthened continuity requirement on allows to obtain more powerful
approximation results with Volterra series. Boyd and Chua have proved the uniform
convergence of finite ( ) Volterra series to any continuous-time Fading Memory system
for the class of input signals with bounded amplitude and bounded slew rate, without any
restrictions on the time interval ( ).
f
f
f
W
f f
�
f u t( )( ) f u t( )( )–[ ]2
⎩ ⎭⎨ ⎬⎧ ⎫
� ε< t 0 T,[ ]∈ f W∈ u∀ �∈, ,
f K
w �� 0 1 ],(→ w t( )t ∞→lim 0=
u1 K∈ ε 0> δ 0> u2 K∈
w t–( ) u1 t( ) u2 t( )–t 0≤sup δ< f u1 t( )( ) f u2 t( )( )– ε<⇒
f
n ∞<
T ∞→
![Page 23: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/23.jpg)
A Framework for Nonlinear Modelling
7
1.3.3 Continuous-time versus Discrete-time
Until now, we have only considered continuous-time Volterra series. However, this thesis
mainly deals with the identification of discrete-time models. The discrete-time version of the
-th order causal Volterra operator is defined as
, (1-8)
where denotes the -th order, discrete-time Volterra kernel.
In [5], the approximation properties of the Volterra series are shown under the Fading
Memory assumption for discrete-time systems. The only difference with the continuous-time
case is that the slew rate of the input signal does not need to be bounded.
1.3.4 Single Input, Single Output versus Multiple Input, Multiple Output
So far, only SISO (Single Input, Single Output) systems were considered, but in Chapter 5 we
will deal with MIMO (Multiple Input, Multiple Output) systems as well. MIMO Volterra models
with outputs are defined as separate MISO Volterra series. In the following, the
analysis is only pursued for discrete-time systems. For notational simplicity, we define as
the vector of the assembled inputs at time instance :
(1-9)
A MISO Volterra series is defined as the sum of Volterra functionals :
(1-10)
Next, consider the -th term of (1-10). The -th order, discrete-time MISO Volterra functional
is defined as
n
Hn u t( )[ ] … hn τ1 … τn, ,( )u t τ1–( )…u t τn–( )
τn 0=
∞
∑τ1 0=
∞
∑=
hn τ1 … τn, ,( ) n
ny ny
u t( )
nu t
u t( )u1 t( )
…unu
t( )=
Hn
y t( ) Hn u t( )[ ]
n 0=
∞
∑=
n n
![Page 24: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/24.jpg)
Chapter 1: Introduction
8
, (1-11)
where are input indices between and , and
. (1-12)
To determine the number of distinct operators of order , we need to apply
some combinatorials. In Appendix 5.A, the same problem is solved in a different context, but
the idea remains the same. Hence, we distinguish
(1-13)
different terms.
1.3.5 What is not included in the Volterra Framework?
Since Volterra series are open loop models, they cannot represent a number of closed loop
phenomena. Bearing the negative definition of nonlinear systems in mind, it is impossible to
give an exhaustive list of the systems that cannot be approximated by Volterra models.
However, it is possible to sum up a couple of examples.
• No Subharmonic Generation
In [60], it was shown that the steady-state response of a Volterra series
to a harmonic input is harmonic, and has the same period as the input.
Hence, systems that generate subharmonics are excluded from the
Volterra-Wiener framework. For this reason, we sometimes say that
Wiener systems are PISPOT (Periodic Input, Same Periodic OuTput)
systems. An example of subharmonic generation is given in the “Duffing
Oscillator” on p. 111.
Hn u t( )[ ] Hn
j1 … jn, ,u t( )[ ]
j1 … jn, ,∑=
ji 1 nu
Hn
j1 … jn, ,u t( )[ ] … h
j1 … jn, ,τ1 … τn, ,( )uj1
t τ1–( )…ujnt τn–( )
τn 0=
∞
∑τ1 0=
∞
∑=
Hn
j1 … jn, ,u t( )[ ] n
nu n 1–+
n⎝ ⎠⎜ ⎟⎛ ⎞ n nu 1–+( )!
n! nu 1–( )!------------------------------=
![Page 25: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/25.jpg)
A Framework for Nonlinear Modelling
9
• No Chaotic Behaviour
Chaos is typically the result of a nonlinear dynamic system of which the
output depends extremely on the initial conditions. Such behaviour
conflicts with the finite memory requirement of the Wiener class: the
present output does not become asymptotically independent of the past.
An example of chaotic behaviour is given in “Lorenz Attractor” on p. 113.
• No Multiple-valued Output
Volterra series are a single-valued output representation. Hence, they
cannot represent systems that exhibit output multiplicity, like for instance
hysteresis.
![Page 26: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/26.jpg)
Chapter 1: Introduction
10
1.4 Outline of the thesis
All the work in this thesis relies on the concept of the Best Linear Approximation (BLA).
Therefore, in Chapter 2 the BLA is first introduced in an intuitive way, and then rigorously
defined for SISO and MIMO nonlinear systems. Furthermore, some interesting properties of
multisine excitation signals with respect to the qualification and quantification of nonlinear
behaviour are rehearsed. Finally, we explain how the BLA should be estimated, for both non
periodic and periodic input/output data. As will become clear in Chapter 2, periodic excitations
are preferred, since in that case more information can be extracted from the Device Under
Test.
The tools described in Chapter 2 are applied to a number of Digital Signal Processing (DSP)
algorithms in Chapter 3. A measurement technique is proposed to characterize the non-
idealities of DSP algorithms which are induced by quantization effects, overflows, or other
nonlinear effects. The main idea is to apply specially designed excitations such that a
distinction can be made between the output of the ideal system and the contributions of the
system’s non-idealities. The proposed method is applied to digital filtering and to an audio
compression codec.
In Chapter 4, an identification procedure is presented for a specific kind of block-oriented
model: the Nonlinear Feedback model. By estimating the Best Linear approximation of the
system and by rearranging the model’s structure, the identification of the feedback model
parameters is reduced to a linear problem. The numerical parameter values obtained by
solving the linear problem are then used as starting values for a nonlinear optimization
procedure. The proposed method is illustrated on measurements obtained from a physical
system.
Chapter 5 introduces the Polynomial Nonlinear State Space model (PNLSS) and studies its
approximation capabilities. Next, a link is established between this model and a number of
classical block-oriented models, such as Hammerstein and Wiener models. Furthermore, by
means of two simple examples, we illustrate that the proposed model class is broader than
the Volterra framework. In the last part of Chapter 5, a general identification procedure is
presented which utilizes the Best Linear Approximation of the nonlinear system. Next,
![Page 27: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/27.jpg)
Outline of the thesis
11
frequency domain subspace identification is employed to initialize the PNLSS model. The
identification of the full PNLSS model is then regarded as a nonlinear optimization problem.
In Chapter 6, the proposed identification procedure is applied to measurements from various
real-life systems. The SISO test cases comprise three electronic circuits (the Silverbox, a
Wiener-Hammerstein system and a RF crystal detector), and two mechanical set-ups (a
quarter car set-up and a robot arm). Furthermore, two mechanical MISO applications are
discussed (a combine harvester and a semi-active magneto-rheological damper).
Finally, Chapter 7 deals with the conclusions and some ideas on further research.
![Page 28: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/28.jpg)
Chapter 1: Introduction
12
1.5 ContributionsThe main goal of this thesis is to study and design tools which allow the practicing engineer to
qualify, to understand and to model nonlinear systems. In this context, the contributions of
this thesis are:
• The characterization of DSP systems/algorithms via the Best Linear Approximation and
multisine excitation signals.
• A method to generate starting values for a block-oriented, Nonlinear Feedback model
with a static nonlinearity in the feedback loop.
• A method that initializes the Polynomial NonLinear State Space (PNLSS) model by
means of the BLA of the Device Under Test.
• The establishment of a link between the PNLSS model structure and five classical block-
oriented models.
• The application of the proposed identification method to several real-life measurement
problems.
![Page 29: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/29.jpg)
Publication List
13
1.6 Publication List
Chapter 3 was published as
• J. Paduart, J. Schoukens, Y. Rolain. Fast Measurement of Quantization Distortions in DSP
Algorithms. IEEE Transactions on Instrumentation and Measurement, vol. 56, no. 5,
pp. 1917-1923, 2007.
The major part of Chapter 4 was presented at the Nolcos 2004 conference:
• J. Paduart, J. Schoukens. Fast Identification of systems with nonlinear feedback.
Proceedings of the 6th IFAC Symposium on Nonlinear Control Systems, Stuttgart, Germany,
pp. 525-529, 2004.
The comparative study between the PNLSS model and the block-oriented models from
Chapter 5 were presented at IMTC 2007:
• J. Paduart, J. Schoukens, L. Gommé. On the Equivalence between some Block-oriented
Nonlinear Models and the Nonlinear Polynomial State Space Model. Proceedings of the
IEEE Instrumentation and Measurement Technology Conference, Warsaw, Poland, pp. 1-6,
2007.
The identification of the PNLSS model and its application to two real-life set-ups was
presented at the SYSID 2006 conference:
• J. Paduart, J. Schoukens, R. Pintelon, T. Coen. Nonlinear State Space Modelling of
Multivariable Systems. Proceedings of the 14th IFAC Symposium on System Identification,
Newcastle, Australia, pp. 565-569, 2006.
The application of the PNLSS model to a quarter car set-up led to the following publication:
![Page 30: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/30.jpg)
Chapter 1: Introduction
14
• J. Paduart, J. Schoukens, K. Smolders, J. Swevers. Comparison of two different
nonlinear state-space identification algorithms. Proceedings of the International Conference
on Noise and Vibration Engineering, Leuven, Belgium, pp. 2777-2784, 2006.
Finally, the cooperation with colleagues from the ELEC Department (Vrije Universiteit Brussel),
the PMA and BIOSYST-MeBioS Department (KULeuven) resulted in the following publications:
• J. Schoukens, J. Swevers, J. Paduart, D. Vaes, K. Smolders, R. Pintelon. Initial estimates
for block structured nonlinear systems with feedback. Proceedings of the International
Symposium on Nonlinear Theory and its Applications, Brugge, Belgium, pp. 622-625, 2005.
• J. Schoukens, R. Pintelon, J. Paduart, G. Vandersteen. Nonparametric Initial Estimates
for Wiener-Hammerstein systems. Proceedings of the 14th IFAC Symposium on System
Identification, Newcastle, Australia, pp. 778-783, 2006.
• T. Coen, J. Paduart, J. Anthonis, J. Schoukens, J. De Baerdemaeker. Nonlinear system
identification on a combine harvester. Proceedings of the American Control Conference,
Minneapolis, Minnesota, USA, pp. 3074-3079, 2006.
![Page 31: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/31.jpg)
15
CHAPTER 2
THE BEST LINEAR
APPROXIMATION
In this chapter, we introduce the Best Linear Approximation in an
intuitive way. Next, the excitation signals used throughout this thesis
are presented, followed by a formal definition of the Best Linear
Approximation. We then explain how the properties of a multisine
excitation signal can be exploited to quantify and qualify the nonlinear
behaviour of a system. Finally, we show how the Best Linear
Approximation of a nonlinear system can be obtained.
![Page 32: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/32.jpg)
Chapter 2: The Best Linear Approximation
16
2.1 IntroductionAs was shown in the introductory chapter, linear models have many attractive properties.
Therefore, it can be useful to approximate nonlinear systems by linear models. Since we are
dealing with an approximation, model errors will be present. Hence, a framework needs to be
selected in order to decide in which sense the approximate linear model is optimal. We will
use a classical approach and minimize the errors in mean square sense.
Definition 2.1 (Best Linear Approximation) The Best Linear Approximation (BLA) is
defined as the model belonging to the set of linear models , such that
, (2-1)
where and are the input and output of the nonlinear system, respectively.
In general, the Best Linear Approximation of a nonlinear system depends on the
amplitude distribution, the power spectrum, and the higher order moments of the stochastic
input [56],[19],[21]. The amplitude dependency is illustrated by means of a short
simulation example.
Example 2.2 Consider the following static nonlinear system:
, (2-2)
and three white excitation signals drawn from different distributions: a uniform, a
Gaussian, and a binary distribution (Figure 2-1 (a)). The parameters of these
distributions are chosen such that their variance is equal to one. Figure 2-1 (b) shows
the BLA (grey) for the three distributions, together with the static nonlinearity (black).
In this set-up, the BLA is a straight line through the origin. Note that in general, a static
nonlinearity does not necessarily have a static BLA [19]. It can be seen from Figure 2-
1 (b) that the slope g of the BLA changes from distribution to distribution.
From this example, it is clear that the properties of the input are of paramount importance
when the BLA of a nonlinear system is determined. That is why we will start by discussing the
class of excitation signals used throughout this thesis. Next, a formal definition of the Best
G �
GBLA y t( ) G u t( )( )– 2{ }�G �∈
arg min=
u t( ) y t( )
GBLA
u t( )
y tanh u( )=
![Page 33: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/33.jpg)
Introduction
17
Linear approximation is given. Then, we will demonstrate how multisine signals can be used
to quantify and qualify the nonlinear behaviour of the Device Under Test (DUT). Finally, we
will show how the BLA can be determined for SISO and MIMO systems.
2 0 22
0
2
(b)
g = 0.67
2 0 22
0
2g = 0.61
2 0 22
0
2g = 0.76
2 0 20
0.25
0.5
Uniform Distribution
(a)
2 0 20
0.25
0.5
Gaussian Distribution
2 0 20
0.25
0.5
Binary Distribution
Figure 2-1. (a) Three different probability density functions;(b) Static nonlinearity (black) and BLA (grey).
![Page 34: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/34.jpg)
Chapter 2: The Best Linear Approximation
18
2.2 Class of Excitation Signals
Since the Best Linear Approximation of a nonlinear system depends on the properties of the
applied input signal, it is important to define the kind of excitations that will be employed, and
to discuss their properties. In this thesis, we will utilize the class of Gaussian excitation signals
with a user-defined power spectrum. Furthermore, it is required that the signals are
stationary such that their power spectrum is well defined. Three excitation signals that are
commonly used belong to : Gaussian noise, Gaussian periodic noise, and random phase
multisines (Figure 2-2). For periodic noise and random phase multisines, this membership is
only asymptotic, i.e., for the number of excited frequency components going to infinity
( ). We will restrict ourselves to Gaussian noise and random phase multisines. We will
give a definition and a brief overview of some of the properties of these signals.
2.2.1 Random Phase Multisine
Definition 2.3 (Random Phase Multisine) A random phase multisine is a periodic
signal, defined as a sum of harmonically related sine waves:
(2-3)
with , , and the maximum frequency of the
excitation signal. The amplitudes are chosen in a custom fashion, according to the
user-defined power spectrum that should be realized. The phases are the realizations
of an independent distributed random process such that .
�
�
N ∞→
Gaussian Signals
Gaussian Periodic Noise
Random Phase Multisines *
Figure 2-2. Class of excitation signals.*: asymptotic result, for the number of excited frequency components going to infinity.
�Gaussian Noise
u t( ) 1
N-------- Uke
j 2πfmaxkN----t φk+⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞
k N–=
N
∑=
φ k– φk–= Uk U k– Ukfmax
N-------------⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞= = fmax
U f( )
φk
ejφk{ }� 0=
![Page 35: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/35.jpg)
Class of Excitation Signals
19
The factor serves as normalization such that, asymptotically ( ), the power of
the multisine remains finite, and its Root Mean Square (RMS) value stays constant as
increases. A typical choice is to take uniformly distributed over , but for instance
discrete phase distributions can be used as well, as long as holds. Note that the
random phase multisine is asymptotically normally distributed ( ), but in practice 20
excited lines works already very well for smoothly varying amplitude distributions [56],[62].
Next, we illustrate some of the properties of a random phase multisine signal with a short
example.
Example 2.4 We consider a random phase multisine with , a flat power
spectrum and = 0.25 Hz. Figure 2-3 (a) shows the histogram of this signal
together with a theoretic Gaussian pdf having the same variance and expected value.
Figure 2-3 (b) and (c) show the multisine in the time and frequency domain,
respectively. From these plots, we see that the random phase multisine has a noisy
behaviour in the time domain, and perfectly realizes the user-defined amplitude
spectrum in the frequency domain.
The main advantage of random phase multisines is the fact that their periodicity can be
exploited to distinguish the measurement noise from the nonlinear distortions [15]. Further in
this chapter, we will go into detail about this property. A drawback is the need to introduce a
settling time for the transients, which is common to periodic excitation signals.
1 N⁄ N ∞→
N
φk [0 2π, )
ejφk{ }� 0=
N ∞→
0 0.2 0.44
2
0
2
4
Am
plit
ude
Probability
(a)
1 128 2564
2
0
2
4
Time [s]
(b)
0 0.250
1
2
Frequency [Hz]
(c)
Figure 2-3. Some properties of a Random Odd, Random Phase Multisine:(a) Histogram (black) and theoretic Gaussian pdf (grey),
(b) Time domain and (c) Frequency domain representation (DFT spectrum).
N 128=
fmax
![Page 36: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/36.jpg)
Chapter 2: The Best Linear Approximation
20
2.2.2 Gaussian Noise
Definition 2.5 (Gaussian Noise) A Gaussian noise signal is a random sequence
drawn from a Gaussian distribution with a user-defined power spectral density.
Example 2.6 An example of a Gaussian noise signal is shown in Figure 2-4 (b). To
generate this sequence, a signal of samples was drawn from a normal
distribution. In order to achieve the same bandwidth as the random phase multisine
from Figure 2-3, the signal was filtered using a 6th order Butterworth filter with a cut-off
frequency of 0.25 Hz. Finally, to obtain the same RMS value as for the multisine
example, the amplitude of the filtered sequence was normalized. Figure 2-4 (a) shows
the histogram of this signal together with a theoretic Gaussian pdf. In Figure 2-4 (c), the
DFT spectrum of the sequence is plotted.
The DFT spectrum of the Gaussian noise contains dips that can lead to unfavourable results
such as a low SNR at some frequencies. Two more disadvantages are associated with the non
periodic nature of random Gaussian noise. First of all, no distinction can be made between the
measurement noise and the nonlinear distortions using simple tools. Secondly, leakage errors
are present when computing the DFT of this signal. Note that when comparing Figure 2-3 and
Figure 2-4, it is impossible to distinguish a random phase multisine and a random Gaussian
noise sequence based on their histogram and time domain waveform.
N 128=
0 0.2 0.44
2
0
2
4
Am
plit
ude
Probability
(a)
1 128 2564
2
0
2
4
Time [s]
(b)
0 0.25 0.50
1
2
Frequency [Hz]
(c)
Figure 2-4. Some properties of filtered random Gaussian Noise:(a) Histogram (black) and Gaussian pdf (grey),
(b) Time domain and (c) Frequency domain representation (DFT spectrum).
![Page 37: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/37.jpg)
Properties of the Best Linear Approximation
21
2.3 Properties of the Best Linear Approximation
2.3.1 Single Input, Single Output Systems
Consider a noiseless Single Input, Single Output (SISO) nonlinear system with an input
and an output (see Figure 2-5 (a)). We make the following assumption on .
Assumption 2.7 There exists a uniformly bounded Volterra series of which the output
converges in mean square sense to the output of for .
These systems are also called Wiener, or PISPOT systems. This class includes discontinuities
like quantizers or relays, and excludes chaotic behaviour or systems with bifurcations.
Theorem 2.8 If satisfies Assumption 2.7, it can be modelled as the sum of a linear
system , called the Best Linear Approximation, and a noise source . The
Best Linear Approximation is calculated as
, (2-4)
where is the auto-power spectrum of the input, and the cross-power
spectrum between the output and the input.
Relation (2-4) is obtained by calculating the Fourier transform of the Wiener-Hopf equation,
which on its turn follows from equation (2-1) (see for instance [24] for this classic result).
Note that by using equation (2-4) no causality is imposed on . In [53], it was
shown that the BLA for Gaussian noise and random phase multisines with an equivalent
power spectrum are asymptotically identical. The BLA for random phase multisines converges
to as the number of frequency components goes to infinity:
(2-5)
The Best Linear Approximation for a nonlinear SISO system is illustrated in Figure 2-5 (b). The
noise source represents that part of the output that cannot be captured by the linear
model . Hence, for frequency we have that
S u
y S
y S u �∈
S
GBLA jω( ) ys
GBLA jω( )Syu jω( )Suu jω( )-------------------=
Suu jω( ) Syu jω( )
GBLA jω( )
GBLA jω( ) N
GBLA N, jω( ) GBLA jω( ) O N 1–( )+=
ys y
GBLA jω( ) ωk
![Page 38: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/38.jpg)
Chapter 2: The Best Linear Approximation
22
. (2-6)
depends on the particular input realization and exhibits a stochastic behaviour from
realization to realization, with . Hence, can be determined by
averaging the system’s response over several input realizations.
2.3.2 Multiple Input, Multiple Output Systems
In [17], the Best Linear Approximation was extended to a Multiple Input, Multiple Output
(MIMO) framework. Consider a noiseless nonlinear system with inputs ( )
and outputs ( ). As in the SISO case, needs to fulfil some conditions in
order to define the Best Linear Approximation.
Assumption 2.9 For , there exists a uniformly bounded MIMO Volterra series of
which the outputs converge in mean square sense to the outputs of for .
Y jωk( ) GBLA jωk( )U jωk( ) Ys jωk( )+=
Ys jωk( )
Ys jωk( ){ }� 0= GBLA jω( )
u
u y
y
nonlinear
system
linearsystem
Figure 2-5. (a) SISO nonlinear system vs. (b) its alternative representation.
(a)
(b)GBLA
yBLA
ys
S ui i 1 … nu, ,=
yj j 1 … ny, ,= S
i j,∀
yj S ui �∈
![Page 39: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/39.jpg)
Properties of the Best Linear Approximation
23
Theorem 2.10 If satisfies Assumption 2.9, it can be modelled as the sum of a linear
system , and noise sources . The Best Linear Approximation of is
calculated as
, (2-7)
where is the auto-power spectrum of the inputs, and
is the cross-power spectrum between the outputs and the inputs.
Also for MIMO systems, it was proven that the Best Linear Approximation for Gaussian noise
and random phase multisines is asymptotically equivalent [17].
Figure 2-6 (a) shows a nonlinear MIMO system with inputs and outputs. In Figure 2-6
(b), the alternative representation of this system is given: the Best Linear Approximation
together with the stochastic nonlinear noise sources .
For frequency , the following equation holds:
, (2-8)
S
GBLA jω( ) ny ysj( ) S
GBLA jω( ) Syu jω( )Suu1–
jω( )=
Suu jω( ) �nu nu×
∈
Syu jω( ) �ny nu×
∈
nonlinear
system
Figure 2-6. (a) MIMO nonlinear system vs. (b) its alternative representation.
(a)
(b)
… …
… …
linear
systemGBLA
ys1( ) ys
2( )ysny( )
yBLA1( )
yBLA2( )
yBLA
ny( )
u1
unu
u2
u1
unu
u2
y1
yny
y2
y1
yny
y2
nu ny
GBLA jω( ) ny Ysj( )
jωk( )
ωk
Y jωk( ) GBLA jωk( )U jωk( ) Ys jωk( )+=
![Page 40: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/40.jpg)
Chapter 2: The Best Linear Approximation
24
with , , , and .
Here also, we have that .
Y jωk( ) �ny 1×
∈ GBLA jωk( ) �ny nu×
∈ U jωk( ) �nu 1×
∈ Ys jωk( ) �ny 1×
∈
Ys jωk( ){ }� 0=
![Page 41: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/41.jpg)
Some Properties of Nonlinear Systems
25
2.4 Some Properties of Nonlinear Systems
From Definition 2.3, we know that the amplitude spectrum of a random phase multisine can
be customized. We will demonstrate that this freedom can be used to detect, quantify and
qualify the nonlinear behaviour of devices that satisfy Assumption 2.7. The tools developed
here will be used extensively in Chapter 3 to characterize Digital Signal Processing (DSP)
algorithms.
2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave
Figure 2-7 shows the response of a linear (a) and a nonlinear (b) system to a sine wave. The
output of the linear system consists of a sine wave, possibly with a modified amplitude and
phase. The output spectrum of the nonlinear system, in general, contains additional spectral
components, harmonically related to the input sine wave. Hence, the spectral components on
the non excited spectral lines indicate the level of nonlinear behaviour of the DUT.
2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour
Using this principle, we can also retrieve qualitative information about the nonlinear behaviour
of the DUT. In Figure 2-8, two kinds of nonlinear systems are considered. In (a), an even
nonlinear system is excited with a sine wave with a frequency . The output spectrum of
this system only contains contributions on the even harmonic lines (green arrows). This is due
linear
system
nonlinear
system
f
|A|
f
|A|
f
|A|
f
|A|
Figure 2-7. Response of (a) a linear system and (b) a nonlinear system to a sine wave.
(a)
(b)
f0
![Page 42: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/42.jpg)
Chapter 2: The Best Linear Approximation
26
to the fact that the output spectrum of an even nonlinear system only contains even
combinations of the input frequencies (e.g. , ,...). For an odd nonlinear system
(b), the converse is true: its output spectrum consists of components on the odd frequency
lines (red arrows). Here, the output spectrum contains only odd combinations of the input
frequencies (e.g. , ,...).
2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for Nonlinearities
Consider now the case of a multisine signal, applied to a nonlinear system (see Figure 2-9).
We will show that by carefully choosing the spectrum of the multisine, we can qualify and
quantify the nonlinear behaviour of the DUT. For a multisine having only odd frequency
components ( , , ,...), the even nonlinearities will only generate spectral components
at even frequencies, since an even combination of odd frequencies always yields in an even
frequency. Hence, the even frequency lines at the output can be used to detect even
nonlinear behaviour of the DUT. Furthermore, odd combinations of odd frequency lines always
f0 f0+ f0 f0–
f0 f0 f0+ + f0 f0 f0–+
f
|A|
f
|A|
f
|A|
f
|A|
Figure 2-8. Response of (a) an even nonlinear system and(b) an odd nonlinear system to a sine wave.
y e u2–=
y tanh u( )=
even nonlinearitye.g.
odd nonlinearitye.g.
(a)
(b)
f
|A|nonlinear
system
f
|A|
Figure 2-9. Response of a nonlinear system to a multisine.
f0 3f0 5f0
![Page 43: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/43.jpg)
Some Properties of Nonlinear Systems
27
result in odd frequency lines. Hence, when some of the odd frequency lines are not excited,
they can serve to detect odd nonlinear behaviour of the DUT [56].
According to which frequency lines are used to detect the nonlinear behaviour, several kinds
of random phase multisines can be distinguished:
• Full multisine: all frequencies up to are excited,
for . (2-9)
• Odd multisine: only the odd lines are excited,
(2-10)
Since even nonlinearities only contribute to the even harmonic output
lines, they do not disturb the FRF measurements in this case. Hence, a
lower uncertainty is achieved for the BLA [64].
• Random odd multisine: this is an odd multisine where the odd frequency
lines are divided into groups with a predefined length, for instance, a
block length of 4. In each block, all odd lines are excited ( )
except for one line which serves as a detection line for the odd
nonlinearities. The frequency index of this line is randomly selected in
each consecutive block [57]. This is the best way to reflect the nonlinear
behaviour of the DUT. Hence this type of multisine should be the default
option when employing random phase multisines.
The ability to analyse the nonlinear behaviour of the DUT comes with a price: the frequency
resolution diminishes or, equivalently, the measurement time increases.
fmax
Uk A= k 1 … N, ,=
UkA k 2n 1+= k N≤ n, �∈0 elsewhere⎩
⎨⎧
=
Uk A=
![Page 44: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/44.jpg)
Chapter 2: The Best Linear Approximation
28
2.5 Estimating the Best Linear ApproximationIn the last part of this chapter, we explain how the Best Linear Approximation of a nonlinear
system can be determined. First, single input, single outputs systems are treated. Next, the
results are extended to MIMO systems. Depending on the kind of excitation signals used
during the experiments, the BLA is calculated differently. Therefore, we will make a distinction
between periodic and non periodic data.
2.5.1 Single Input, Single Output Systems
A. Periodic Data
When using periodic excitation signals to determine the BLA of a SISO system, the
experiments should be carried out according to the scheme depicted in Figure 2-10 [15]. In
total, different random phase multisines are applied, as shown on the vertical axis. After
the transients have settled, we measure for each experiment periods of the input and the
output. Per experiment and period , we compute the DFT of the input ( )
and the output ( ). Then, the spectra are averaged over the periods. For
frequency , we obtain:
(2-11)
For every experiment , we then calculate the FRF estimate :
, (2-12)
which is equivalent to (2-4) for periodic excitations. Next, the FRF estimates
are combined in order to obtain the Best Linear Approximation :
(2-13)
M
P
m p U k( ) m p[ , ]�∈
Y k( ) m p[ , ]�∈
k
U k( )m[ ] 1
P--- U k( ) m p[ , ]
p 1=
P
∑=
Y k( )m[ ] 1
P--- Y k( ) m p[ , ]
p 1=
P
∑=
m G jωk( )m[ ]
�∈
G jωk( )m[ ] Y k( )
m[ ]
U k( ) m[ ]
--------------------=
M G jωk( )m[ ]
GBLA jωk( )
GBLA jωk( ) 1M----- G jωk( )
m[ ]
m 1=
M
∑=
![Page 45: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/45.jpg)
Estimating the Best Linear Approximation
29
Furthermore, due to the periodic nature of the excitation signals, the effect of the nonlinear
distortions and the measurement noise on the Best Linear Approximation can be distinguished
from each other. The variations over the periods stem from the measurement noise, while
the variations over the experiments are due to the combined effect of the measurement
noise and the stochastic nonlinear behaviour. Note that non-stationary disturbances such as
non-synchronous periodic signals can also be detected using the measurement scheme from
Figure 2-10 [15]. First, we will determine the sample variance of due to the
measurement noise. A straightforward way to achieve this is to calculate the FRFs per period:
, (2-14)
and to employ to calculate the sample variance of , which is
then given by
. (2-15)
periods
expe
rimen
ts
Transient
U1 1[ , ]
Y1 1[ , ],
G1[ ]
σn2 1[ ]
,U
1 P[ , ]Y
1 P[ , ],
U2 1[ , ]
Y2 1[ , ], U
2 P[ , ]Y
2 P[ , ],
UM 1[ , ]
YM 1[ , ], U
M P[ , ]Y
M P[ , ],G
M[ ]σn
2 M[ ],
G2[ ]
σn2 2[ ]
,…
…
…… ……
…
Figure 2-10. Experiment design to calculate the BLA of a SISO nonlinear system.
P
m 1=
m 2=
m M=
M
P
M
GBLA jωk( )
G jωk( )m p,[ ] Y k( ) m p[ , ]
U k( ) m p[ , ]-----------------------=
G jωk( )m p,[ ]
σn2 m[ ]
G jωk( )m[ ]
σn2 m[ ] 1
P P 1–( )--------------------- G jωk( )
m p,[ ]G jωk( )
m[ ]–
2
p 1=
P
∑=
![Page 46: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/46.jpg)
Chapter 2: The Best Linear Approximation
30
The drawback of this approach is that in equation (2-14) raw input data are employed without
increasing the SNR by averaging over the periods. If the SNR of the input is low, the estimates
will be of poor quality: a non negligible bias is present (SNR < 10 dB, [55]) and
a high uncertainty (SNR < 20 dB, [54]). A better option to determine is to use the
covariance information from the averaged input and output spectra, and to apply a first order
approximation [56]. First, we calculate the sample variances and covariance of the estimated
spectra and :
(2-16)
In (2-16), the frequency index was omitted in order to simplify the formulas. From
, , and , the sample variance of can
be approximated by [56]:
, (2-17)
with . In a noiseless input framework, expression (2-17) simplifies to
. (2-18)
Next, the estimates are averaged in order to acquire an improved estimate:
. (2-19)
After applying the -law, we obtain the uncertainty of due to the measurement
noise:
G jωk( )m p,[ ]
σn2 m[ ]
U k( )m[ ]
Y k( )m[ ]
σU2 m[ ] 1
P 1–------------ U
m p[ , ]U
m[ ]–
2
p 1=
P
∑=
σY2 m[ ] 1
P 1–------------ Y
m p[ , ]Y
m[ ]–
2
p 1=
P
∑=
σYU2 m[ ] 1
P 1–------------ Y
m p[ , ]Y
m[ ]–( ) U
m p[ , ]U
m[ ]–( )
p 1=
P
∑=
k
σU2 m[ ]
�∈ σY2 m[ ]
�∈ σYU2 m[ ]
�∈ σn2 m[ ]
G jωk( )m[ ]
σn2 m[ ] G
m[ ] 2
P-----------------
σY2 m[ ]
Ym[ ] 2
----------------σU
2 m[ ]
Um[ ] 2
----------------- 2ReσYU
2 m[ ]
Ym[ ]
Um[ ]
-----------------------
⎝ ⎠⎜ ⎟⎜ ⎟⎛ ⎞
–+⎝ ⎠⎜ ⎟⎜ ⎟⎛ ⎞
=
σn2 m[ ]
�∈
σn2 m[ ] 1
P---
σY2 m[ ]
Um[ ] 2
-----------------⎝ ⎠⎜ ⎟⎛ ⎞
=
M σn2 m[ ]
1M----- σn
2 m[ ]
m 1=
M
∑
N GBLA
![Page 47: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/47.jpg)
Estimating the Best Linear Approximation
31
(2-20)
Furthermore, the combined effect of the stochastic nonlinear behaviour and the measurement
noise can also be measured by calculating the total sample variance . It is determined
from the estimates :
(2-21)
The total variance of the BLA is equal to the sum of the measurement noise variance and the
variance due to the stochastic nonlinear contributions :
(2-22)
Hence, is estimated with
. (2-23)
To conclude, for frequency index we now have:
σn2 1
M2
------- σn2 m[ ]
m 1=
M
∑=
σBLA2
M G jωk( )m[ ]
σBLA2 1
M M 1–( )------------------------ G
m[ ]GBLA–
2
m 1=
M
∑=
σNL2 k( )
σBLA2 k( ) σNL
2 k( ) σn2 k( )+=
σNL2 k( )
σNL2 k( ) σBLA
2 k( ) σn2 k( )–=
k
• : The Best Linear Approximation.
• : The total sample variance of the estimate , due
to the combined effect of the measurement noise and the stochastic
nonlinear behaviour.
• : The measurement noise sample variance of the estimate
.
• : The sample variance of the stochastic nonlinear contributions.
GBLA jωk( )
σBLA2 k( ) GBLA jωk( )
σn2 k( )
GBLA jωk( )
σNL2 k( )
![Page 48: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/48.jpg)
Chapter 2: The Best Linear Approximation
32
B. Non Periodic Data
A combination of higher order correlation tests can be used to detect unmodelled
nonlinearities for arbitrary excitations [20]. But in opposition to the case of periodic excitation
signals, no simple methods exist to distinguish between the nonlinear distortions and the
effect of measurement noise when non periodic excitations are used. Furthermore, leakage
errors will be present when calculating the input and output DFT spectra [53]. However, it is
still possible to characterize the combined effect of nonlinear distortions and measurement
noise if we assume a noiseless input framework.
First, the measured input and output time domain data are split into blocks. In order to
reduce the leakage effect, a Hanning or a diff window can for instance be applied to the
signals; we will employ the latter [65]. Then, the input and output DFT spectra of each block
are calculated. The next step is to calculate the sample cross-power spectrum between the
output and the input and the auto-power spectrum of the input , using
Welch’s method [84]:
. (2-24)
The BLA is then given by
. (2-25)
When working in a noiseless input framework, it can be shown that the following expression
yields an unbiased estimate of the covariance of the output DFT :
, (2-26)
where the factor 2 stems from the usage of the diff window. From this expression, we can
derive the uncertainty of (see the end result of Appendix 2.B, simplified to the
SISO case):
M
SYU k( ) SUU k( )
SXY1M----- X
m[ ]Y
m[ ]H
m 1=
M
∑=
GBLA jωk( )SYU k( )
SUU k( )------------------=
Y k( )
σY2 k( ) M
2 M 1–( )---------------------- SYY k( ) GBLA jωk( )SUY k( )–( )=
GBLA jωk( )
![Page 49: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/49.jpg)
Estimating the Best Linear Approximation
33
(2-27)
To summarize, for frequency we have:
Remark: When choosing the number of blocks to split the input and output data, a trade-
off is made between the leakage effects and the uncertainty due to the stochastic nonlinear
behaviour and the measurement noise. When is large, this results in shorter time records
of length . Hence, the leakage will be more important, since leakage is a effect for
a rectangular window, and a effect for a Hanning window [53]. Furthermore, the
frequency resolution diminishes with increasing . On the other hand, it can be seen from
(2-27) that the uncertainty on the estimate reduces for a larger . To conclude, with
the number of blocks we can balance between a lower variance and a better frequency
resolution of the BLA.
σBLA2 k( ) 1
M-----
σY2 k( )
SUU k( )------------------=
k
• : The Best Linear Approximation.
• : The total sample variance of the estimate , due
to the combined effect of the measurement noise and the stochastic
nonlinear behaviour.
GBLA jωk( )
σBLA2 k( ) GBLA jωk( )
M
M
N O N1–( )
O N2–( )
M
G k( ) M
M
![Page 50: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/50.jpg)
Chapter 2: The Best Linear Approximation
34
2.5.2 Multiple Input, Multiple Output Systems
Next, we explain how the Best Linear Approximation is estimated for MIMO systems. In the
case of periodic excitation signals, the essential difference between the SISO and the MIMO
framework is the need for multiple experiments. This stems from the fact that the influences
of the different inputs, superposed in a single experiment, need to be separated. Again, a
distinction is made between periodic and non periodic data.
A. Periodic Data
When periodic signals are employed to determine the Best Linear Approximation of a MIMO
system, the experiments are usually carried out according to the scheme depicted in Figure 2-
11. In total, blocks of experiments are performed, as shown on the vertical axis. After
the transients have settled, periods of the input and the output are measured for each
experiment. Per block and period , we assemble the DFT spectra of the inputs
and outputs in the matrices and , respectively.
Then, the input and output spectra are averaged over the periods per block . For frequency
, we have:
(2-28)
For every block , we now calculate an FRF estimate :
. (2-29)
The FRF estimates are then combined in order to obtain the Best Linear
Approximation :
(2-30)
M nu
P
m p nu nu
ny U k( ) m p[ , ]�
nu nu×∈ Y k( ) m p[ , ]
�ny nu×
∈
m
k
U k( )m[ ] 1
P--- U k( ) m p[ , ]
p 1=
P
∑=
Y k( )m[ ] 1
P--- Y k( ) m p[ , ]
p 1=
P
∑=
m G jωk( )m[ ]
�ny nu×
∈
G jωk( )m[ ]
Y k( )m[ ]
U k( ) m[ ]
⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞
1–=
M G jωk( )m[ ]
GBLA jωk( )
GBLA jωk( ) 1M----- G jωk( )
m[ ]
m 1=
M
∑=
![Page 51: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/51.jpg)
Estimating the Best Linear Approximation
35
Again, we are able to make a distinction between the nonlinear distortions and the effect of
the measurement noise. First, we will determine the sample covariance matrix of
due to the measurement noise. For the discussion why the calculation should be carried out
via the covariances of the input and output spectra, we refer to the SISO case (“Periodic Data”
on p. 28). The sample covariance matrices of the averaged DFT spectra and
are given by:
(2-31)
In (2-31), the frequency index was omitted in order to simplify the formulas. From
, , and , the sample
covariance of is estimated with (see Appendix 2.A):
periods
expe
rimen
ts
Transient
U1 1[ , ]
Y1 1[ , ],
G1[ ]
Cn1[ ]
,U
1 P[ , ]Y
1 P[ , ],
U2 1[ , ]
Y2 1[ , ], U
2 P[ , ]Y
2 P[ , ],
UM 1[ , ]
YM 1[ , ], U
M P[ , ]Y
M P[ , ],G
M[ ]Cn
M[ ],
G2[ ]
Cn2[ ]
,…
…
…… ……
…
Figure 2-11. Experiment design to calculate the BLA of a MIMO nonlinear system.
P
Mn u
×
m 1=
m 2=
m M=
…
GBLA jωk( )
U k( )m[ ]
Y k( )m[ ]
CU
m[ ]1
P P 1–( )--------------------- vec U
m p[ , ]U
m[ ]–⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞ vec Um p[ , ]
U
m[ ]–⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞H
p 1=
P
∑=
CY
m[ ]1
P P 1–( )--------------------- vec Y
m p[ , ]Y
m[ ]–⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞ vec Ym p[ , ]
Y
m[ ]–⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞H
p 1=
P
∑=
CYU
m[ ]1
P P 1–( )--------------------- vec Y
m p[ , ]Y
m[ ]–⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞ vec Um p[ , ]
U
m[ ]–⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞H
p 1=
P
∑=
k
CU
m[ ] �nunu nunu×
∈ CY
m[ ] �nynu nynu×
∈ CYU
m[ ] �nynu nunu×
∈
Cnm[ ]
Gm[ ]
![Page 52: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/52.jpg)
Chapter 2: The Best Linear Approximation
36
(2-32)
with . In a noiseless input framework, expression (2-32) simplifies to
(2-33)
Since estimates are at our disposal, we can combine them in order to obtain an
improved estimate of the covariance matrix that characterizes the measurement noise:
(2-34)
The combined effect of the stochastic nonlinear behaviour and the measurement noise is
characterized by the total sample covariance . This quantity is determined from the
estimates :
(2-35)
The total covariance of the BLA is equal to the sum of the measurement noise covariance
and the covariance due to the stochastic nonlinear contributions :
(2-36)
Hence, is estimated with
(2-37)
Cnm[ ]
U
m[ ]⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞
T–Iny
⊗⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞ C
Ym[ ] U
m[ ]⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞
T–Iny
⊗⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞
H…+=
U
m[ ]⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞
T–G
m[ ]⊗⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞ CU
m[ ] U
m[ ]⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞
T–G
m[ ]⊗⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞H
…+ +
2herm U
m[ ]⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞
T–Iny
⊗⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞ C
YUm[ ] U
m[ ]⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞
T–G
m[ ]⊗⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞H
⎩ ⎭⎨ ⎬⎧ ⎫
–
Cnm[ ]
�nynu nynu×
∈
Cnm[ ]
U
m[ ]⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞ T–
Iny⊗⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞ CY
m[ ] U
m[ ]⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞ T–
Iny⊗⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞H=
M Cnm[ ]
Cn1
M2
------- Cnm[ ]
m 1=
M
∑=
CBLA M
G jωk( )m[ ]
CBLA1
M M 1–( )------------------------ vec G
m[ ]GBLA–⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞ vec G
m[ ]GBLA–⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞H
m 1=
M
∑=
Cn k( ) CNL k( )
CBLA k( ) CNL k( ) Cn k( )+=
CNL k( )
CNL k( ) CBLA k( ) Cn k( )–=
![Page 53: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/53.jpg)
Estimating the Best Linear Approximation
37
To conclude, for frequency we have:
Remark: When random phase multisines are used to perform FRF measurements on a
multivariable system, it is possible to make an optimal choice for the phases. Within a block of
experiments , orthogonal random phase multisines should be used whenever possible, as
they are optimal in the sense that they minimize the variance of the estimated BLA [18],[85].
When these signals are used, the condition number of the matrix in equation (2-29)
equals one. Hence, the inverse of in (2-29) is calculated in optimal numerical
conditions.
Orthonormal random phase multisines are created in the following way. First, ordinary
random phase multisines are generated: . Then, a unitary matrix is
used to define the excitation signals for the experiments. For frequency , the applied
signal is:
, (2-38)
where we omitted the index . For , the DFT matrix can for instance be used:
, (2-39)
k
• : The Best Linear Approximation.
• : The total sample covariance matrix of the estimate
, due to the combined effect of the measurement noise and
the stochastic nonlinear behaviour.
• : The measurement noise sample covariance matrix of the
estimate .
• : The sample covariance of the stochastic nonlinear
contributions.
GBLA jωk( )
CBLA k( )
GBLA jωk( )
Cn k( )
GBLA jωk( )
CNL k( )
m
U k( )m[ ]
U k( )m[ ]
nu
U1 … Unu, , W �
nu nu×∈
nu k
U k( )
w11U1
k( ) … w1nuU
nuk( )
… … …
wnu1U1
k( ) … wnunuU
nu
k( )
=
m[ ] W
wkl1
nu
---------expj– 2π k 1–( ) l 1–( )
nu--------------------------------------------⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞=
![Page 54: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/54.jpg)
Chapter 2: The Best Linear Approximation
38
where is the element of at position . In the case of a system with three inputs
( ), we have
. (2-40)
B. Non Periodic Data
Contrary to the case of periodic excitation signals, no simple methods are available to
distinguish between the nonlinear distortions and the noise effects when non periodic
excitations are used. Furthermore, leakage errors will be present when calculating the input
and the output spectra. However, it is still possible to characterize the combined effect of the
nonlinear distortions and the measurement noise.
First, the input and output data are split into blocks. Then, the input and output DFT
spectra are calculated per block. Again, leakage effects are diminished by means of a Hanning
or diff window [65]. The next step is to calculate the sample cross-power spectrum of the
inputs and outputs and the auto-power spectrum of the inputs using (2-24).
The Best Linear Approximation is then given by
. (2-41)
If we assume noiseless inputs, the following expression can be used to calculate the
covariance of the output spectrum:
, (2-42)
where the factor 2 stems from using a diff window. Making use of , the uncertainty of
can be derived (see Appendix 2.B):
(2-43)
wkl W k l,( )
nu 3=
W1
3-------
1 1 1
1j– 2π3
-----------⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞exp
j2π3
--------⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞exp
1j2π3
--------⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞exp
j– 2π3
-----------⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞exp
=
M nu>
SYU k( ) SUU k( )
GBLA jωk( ) SYU k( )SUU1–
k( )=
CY k( ) M2 M nu–( )------------------------ SYY k( ) GBLA jωk( )SUY k( )–( )=
CY k( )
GBLA jωk( )
CBLA k( ) 1M----- S
UU
T–k( ) CY k( )⊗=
![Page 55: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/55.jpg)
Estimating the Best Linear Approximation
39
To summarize, for frequency we have:
Remark: Again, a trade-off is made when choosing the number of blocks . See the SISO
case (“Non Periodic Data” on p. 32) for a discussion.
k
• : The Best Linear Approximation.
• : The total sample covariance matrix of the estimate
, due to the combined effect of the measurement noise and
the stochastic nonlinear behaviour.
GBLA jωk( )
CBLA k( )
GBLA jωk( )
M
![Page 56: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/56.jpg)
Chapter 2: The Best Linear Approximation
40
Appendix 2.A Calculation of the FRF Covariance from the Input/Output CovariancesThe measured input and output DFT coefficients for a block of experiments are given by
(2-44)
for frequencies . and are the noiseless
Fourier coefficients; and are the contributions of all the noise sources in the
experimental set-up.
Assumption 2.11 (Disturbing Noise): The input and output errors
satisfy the following set of equations:
(2-45)
Furthermore, we assume that and are independent of and
.
The FRF estimate is given by
. (2-46)
nu
U k( ) U0 k( ) NU k( )+=
Y k( ) Y0 k( ) NY k( )+=
k 1 … F, ,= U0 k( ) �nu nu×
∈ Y0 k( ) �ny nu×
∈
NU k( ) NY k( )
NU k( ) NY k( )
vec NU k( )( ){ }� 0=
vec NY k( )( ){ }� 0=
vec NU
k( )⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞ vec NU
k( )⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞
H
⎩ ⎭⎨ ⎬⎧ ⎫
� CU k( )=
vec NY
k( )⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞ vec NY
k( )⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞
H
⎩ ⎭⎨ ⎬⎧ ⎫
� CY k( )=
vec NY
k( )⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞ vec NU
k( )⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞
H
⎩ ⎭⎨ ⎬⎧ ⎫
� CYU k( ) CUYH
k( )= =
NU k( ) NY k( ) U0 k( )
Y0 k( )
G jωk( )
G jωk( ) Y k( )U k( ) 1–Y0 k( ) NY
k( )+⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞ U0
k( ) NU k( )+⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞
1–= =
![Page 57: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/57.jpg)
Estimating the Best Linear Approximation
41
We will calculate the variability of the FRF estimate using a first order Taylor approximation.
For notational simplicity, we will omit the frequency index in the following calculations. First,
we isolate from :
(2-47)
Next, we apply the Taylor expansion, restricting ourselves to the first order terms. For small
, we have
. (2-48)
When we apply this to (2-47), we obtain
, (2-49)
and when we omit the second order terms in and ,
. (2-50)
We define
, (2-51)
and then rewrite (2-50):
(2-52)
Hence, we obtain
. (2-53)
In order to compute as a function of and , we will apply the
following vectorization property:
k
U01–
U1–
G Y0 NY+( ) InuNUU0
1–+⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞U0⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞ 1–
Y0 NY+( )U01–
InuNUU0
1–+⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞ 1–= =
α
Inu
α+⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞ 1–
Inuα–≈
G Y0 NY+( )U01–
InuNUU0
1––⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞=
NU NY
G Y0U01–
Y0U01–NUU0
1–– NYU0
1–+=
G0 Y0( )U01–
=
G G0 NG+ G0 G0NUU01–
– NYU01–
+= =
NG NYU01–
G0NUU01–
–=
vec NG( ) vec NU( ) vec NY( )
![Page 58: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/58.jpg)
Chapter 2: The Best Linear Approximation
42
(2-54)
This results in
. (2-55)
Next, we determine the covariance matrix which is defined as
. (2-56)
By combining equations (2-45), (2-55) and (2-56), we obtain:
(2-57)
vec ABC( ) CT
A⊗( )vec B( )=
vec NG( ) U0T–
Iny⊗⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞ vec NY( ) U0
T–G0⊗⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞ vec NU( )–=
CG
CG vec NG( )vec NG( )H
⎩ ⎭⎨ ⎬⎧ ⎫
�=
CG U0T–
Iny⊗⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞CY U0T–
Iny⊗⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞HU0
T–G0⊗⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞CU U0
T–G0⊗⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞H…+ +=
2herm U0T–
Iny⊗⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞CYU U0
T–G0⊗⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞H
⎩ ⎭⎨ ⎬⎧ ⎫
–
![Page 59: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/59.jpg)
Estimating the Best Linear Approximation
43
Appendix 2.B Covariance of the FRF for Non Periodic DataIf we assume a noiseless input framework, then the measured input and output DFT spectra
for block are given by
(2-58)
for frequencies . and are the noiseless DFT
spectra; represents the contributions of all the noise sources and the stochastic
nonlinear behaviour in the experimental set-up.
Assumption 2.12 (Disturbing Noise): The output error satisfies the
following set of equations:
(2-59)
Furthermore, we assume that is uncorrelated with or .
The noiseless FRF estimate is given by
. (2-60)
We will calculate the variability of the FRF estimate and omit the frequency index in the
following calculations for notational simplicity. From (2-58), we have
. (2-61)
We right-multiply both sides of equation (2-61) with , and compute the summation
over block index :
m
Um[ ]
k( ) U0m[ ]
k( )=
Ym[ ]
k( ) Y0m[ ]
k( ) NYm[ ]
k( )+=
k 1 … F, ,= U0 k( ) �nu 1×
∈ Y0 k( ) �ny 1×
∈
NYm[ ]
k( )
NYm[ ]
k( )
NYm[ ]
k( )⎩ ⎭⎨ ⎬⎧ ⎫
� 0=
NYm[ ]
k( )NYm[ ]H
k( )⎩ ⎭⎨ ⎬⎧ ⎫
� CY k( )=
NYm[ ]
k( ) U0 k( ) Y0 k( )
G0 jωk( )
G0 jωk( ) SY0U0k( )SU0U0
1–k( )=
k
Ym[ ]
Y0m[ ]
NYm[ ]
+ GU0m[ ]
= =
1M-----U
0
m[ ]H
m
![Page 60: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/60.jpg)
Chapter 2: The Best Linear Approximation
44
(2-62)
or when we apply (2-24)
. (2-63)
We then right-multiply (2-63) with and use (2-60):
(2-64)
Hence, we obtain
. (2-65)
In order to compute as a function of , we apply the
vectorization property
. (2-66)
This results in
. (2-67)
Next, we determine the covariance matrix which is defined as
. (2-68)
By combining equations (2-67) and (2-68) we obtain:
1M----- Y0
m[ ]U0
m[ ]H
m 1=
M
∑1M----- NY
m[ ]U0
m[ ]H
m 1=
M
∑+ G1M----- U0
m[ ]U0
m[ ]H
m 1=
M
∑=
SY0U0
1M----- NY
m[ ]U0
m[ ]H
m 1=
M
∑+ GSU0U0=
SU0U0
1–
G G0 NG+ G01M----- NY
m[ ]U0
m[ ]HSU0U0
1–
m 1=
M
∑+= =
NG1M----- NY
m[ ]U0
m[ ]HSU0U0
1–
m 1=
M
∑=
vec NG( ) vec NYm[ ]( ) NY
m[ ]=
vec ABC( ) CT
A⊗( )vec B( )=
vec NG( ) 1M----- U0
m[ ]HSU0U0
1–
⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞
TIny
⊗⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞NY
m[ ]
m 1=
M
∑=
CG
CG vec NG( )vec NG( )H
⎩ ⎭⎨ ⎬⎧ ⎫
�=
![Page 61: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/61.jpg)
Estimating the Best Linear Approximation
45
(2-69)
In order to eliminate the two sums, we make use of the independency of and for
, and of and for . We also have that is uncorrelated with
for any and . This results in
. (2-70)
Applying (2-59) together with , and taking into account the fact that
, results in
. (2-71)
Next, we make use of the Mixed-Product rule:
, (2-72)
provided that , , , have compatible matrix dimensions. We then obtain
, (2-73)
or finally, after using (2-24) and reintroducing the frequency index :
. (2-74)
CG1
M2
------- U0m[ ]H
SU0U0
1–
⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞
TIny
⊗⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞NY
m[ ]
m 1=
M
∑⎝ ⎠⎜ ⎟⎜ ⎟⎛ ⎞
…×
⎩⎪⎨⎪⎧
�=
… U0n[ ]H
SU0U0
1–
⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞
TIny
⊗⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞NY
n[ ]
n 1=
M
∑⎝ ⎠⎜ ⎟⎜ ⎟⎛ ⎞H
⎭⎪⎬⎪⎫
×
NY
m[ ]NY
n[ ]
m n≠ U0m[ ]
U0n[ ]
m n≠ NY
m[ ] U0n[ ]
m n
CG1
M2
------- U0m[ ]H
SU0U0
1–
⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞T
Iny⊗⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞NY
m[ ]NY
m[ ]HU0
m[ ]HSU0U0
1–
⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞TH
Iny⊗⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞⎩ ⎭⎨ ⎬⎧ ⎫
�
m 1=
M
∑=
SXX1–( )
HSXX
1–=
CY 1 CY⊗=
CG1
M2
------- SU0U0
T–U0
m[ ]HTIny
⊗⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞ 1 CY
⊗⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞ U0
m[ ]TSU0U0
T–Iny
⊗⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞
⎩ ⎭⎨ ⎬⎧ ⎫
�
m 1=
M
∑=
A B⊗( ) C D⊗( ) AC BD⊗=
A B C D
CG1M----- SU0U0
T– 1M----- U0
m[ ]U0
m[ ]H
m 1=
M
∑⎝ ⎠⎜ ⎟⎜ ⎟⎛ ⎞ T
SU0U0
T–
⎝ ⎠⎜ ⎟⎜ ⎟⎛ ⎞
CY
⊗
⎩ ⎭⎪ ⎪⎨ ⎬⎪ ⎪⎧ ⎫
�=
k
CG k( ) 1M----- S
U0U0
T–k( ) CY
k( )⊗=
![Page 62: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/62.jpg)
Chapter 2: The Best Linear Approximation
46
![Page 63: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/63.jpg)
47
CHAPTER 3
FAST MEASUREMENT OF
QUANTIZATION DISTORTIONS
A measurement technique is proposed to characterize the non-
idealities of DSP algorithms which are induced by quantization effects,
overflows (fixed point), or nonlinear distortions in one single
experiment/simulation. The main idea is to apply specially designed
multisine excitations such that a distinction can be made between the
output of the ideal system and the contributions of the system’s non-
idealities. This approach allows to compare and quantify the quality of
different implementation alternatives. Applications of this method
include for instance digital filters, FFTs, and audio codecs.
![Page 64: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/64.jpg)
Chapter 3: Fast Measurement of Quantization Distortions
48
3.1 IntroductionDigital Signal Processing (DSP) systems have the advantage of being flexible when compared
with analog circuits. However, they are prone to calculation errors, especially when a fixed
point implementation is used. These errors induce non-ideal signal contributions at the output
such as the presence of quantization noise, limit cycles, and nonlinear distortions. In order to
be sure that the design specifications are still met, it is necessary to verify the presence of
these effects and to quantify them. A simple approach uses single sine excitations to test the
system. Unfortunately, this method does not reveal all problems and requires many
experiments in order to cover the full frequency range. A more thorough approach consists in
a theoretical analysis of the Device Under Test (DUT). A good example of this is given in [50],
where the effects of coefficient quantization of Infinite Impulse Response (IIR) systems is
analysed. The main disadvantage is that for every new DUT, or for every different
implementation of the DUT, the full analysis needs to be repeated. This can be an involved
and time consuming task, as a different approach may be needed for every new DUT.
In this chapter, a method is proposed that detects and quantifies the quantization errors using
one single multisine experiment with a well chosen amplitude spectrum. First, the
measurement concept will be introduced. Then, a brief discussion of the major errors in DSP
algorithms will be given. Finally, the results will be illustrated on a number of examples.
![Page 65: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/65.jpg)
The Multisine as a Detection Tool for Non-idealities
49
3.2 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for Non-idealitiesHere, a special kind of multisine will be used, namely a Random Odd Multisine (see “The
Multisine as a Detection Tool for Nonlinearities” on p. 26). Using this excitation signal, it is
possible to extract the BLA of the DSP system for the class of Gaussian excitations
with a fixed Power Spectral Density [62],[66]. The BLA can be obtained in two ways. The first
way is to average the measured transfer functions for different phase realizations of the input
multisine (see “Estimating the Best Linear Approximation” on p. 28). The second way is to
identify a low order parametric model from a single phase realization. In order to have a
realistic idea of the level of nonlinear distortions, the power spectrum of the excitation signal
should be chosen such that it coincides with the power spectrum of the expected input signal
of the system in later use.
To summarize, the aim of the proposed method is two-folded:
1. Extract the BLA in order to evaluate the linear behaviour of the DSP system;
2. Detect and quantify the nonlinear effects in the DSP system in order to see whether
the design specifications are met.
The main advantage of this method is that it can be used for any DSP system or algorithm, as
long as the aim is to achieve a linear operation. A possible drawback is the limitation to a
specific class of input signals. However, it must be said that the class of Gaussian signals is
not that restrictive, since, for example, most telecommunication signals fall inside this class
[4], [13].
GBLA jω( )
![Page 66: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/66.jpg)
Chapter 3: Fast Measurement of Quantization Distortions
50
3.3 DSP ErrorsIn this section, multisines are used to quantify the quantization distortions. A fixed point
digital filter serves as an example. The advantages of a fixed point representation in DSP
systems are well-known when compared to floating point processing: they are both faster and
cheaper. However, they suffer from a number of serious drawbacks as well. Fixed point
implementations require some knowledge about the expected dynamic range of the input
signal and the intermediate signal levels. They induce a finite numerical precision and a finite
dynamic range for the internal representation of the processed samples. In contrast with a
fixed point representation, floating point arithmetic allows input numbers with a practically
unlimited dynamic range. Depending on how the numbers are quantized (e.g. ceil, floor or
round), different kinds of distortion arise in the fixed point implementation. The overflow
behaviour (saturation or two’s complement overflow) also plays an important role, because it
can lead to a higher level of distortions and even to chaotic behaviour [8].
To investigate the influence of the finite quantization and the range problems, a fourth order
Butterworth low pass filter is considered with a normalized cut-off frequency of to be
operated at a sampling rate of . The normalized, non-quantized filter coefficients
are (in Matlab notation, with a precision of five digits after the decimal point):
(3-1)
with the numerator, and the denominator coefficients.
The filter is implemented in Direct Form (DF) II [50], with 32 bit wide accumulators and a 16
bit wide data memory, including one sign bit. The fixed point representation is illustrated in
Figure 3-1. The accumulators consist of 14 integer bits and 17 fractional bits; the memory has
7 integer bits and 8 fractional bits. These settings are summarized in Table 3-1, together with
the largest and smallest numbers that can be achieved, and the least significant bit (lsb). The
lsb is nothing more than the numerical resolution.
0.2Hz
fs 1Hz=
b 0.00204 0.00814 0.01222 0.00814 0.00204=
a 0.42203 -1.00000 0.97657 -0.44510 0.07908=
b a
1 2 3
Figure 3-1. Fixed point representation:1: Sign bit - 2: Integer bits - 3: Fractional bits.
![Page 67: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/67.jpg)
DSP Errors
51
The input signal consists of 16 phase realizations of a Random Odd Multisine, each with a
period length of 1024 samples. The random grid has excited lines between DC ( )
and 80% of the Nyquist frequency ( ). Using a block length of 4, this results in 154
excited harmonic lines. The default RMS value of the input signal is set to about 328 lsb,
which is 1% of the largest number that can be represented in the data memory. Two periods
of each phase realization are applied. Here, the first period of the output signal is discarded in
order to eliminate transients. A common way to determine the number of samples that need
to be discarded is plotting the difference between the subsequent output periods. Then, by
visual inspection the number of required transient points can be determined.
Next, the Best Linear Approximation is calculated by averaging the measured Frequency
Response Functions (FRFs) for each phase realization [56]. The total length of the input
sequence applied to the DUT is in our experiment 1024 * 2 * 16 = 32 768 samples. The
default truncation and overflow behaviour (these terms will be explained in the following
sections) are set to rounding and saturation, respectively, but we will alter these settings in
order to analyse their influence.
3.3.1 Truncation Errors of the Filter Coefficients
Numerous different truncation methods exist [34]. Since the exact implementation of the
truncation is of no importance to the proposed method, we shall consider two common
truncation methods: arithmetic rounding and flooring. Both truncation methods are depicted
in Figure 3-2. The solid black line represents the truncation characteristic, the dashed line
stands for the ideal behaviour, and the grey line shows the average behaviour of the
truncation method. The floor operation is often used since it requires the least computation
time: the least significant bits of the calculated samples are simply discarded. However, it
introduces an average offset of ½ lsb, which is not present when using the computationally
more involved rounding method.
Sign Bit Int. Bits Fr. Bits Max. Val. Min. Val. lsb
Accumulator 1 14 17 214 - 2-17 -214 2-17
Memory 1 7 8 27 - 2-8 -27 2-8
Table 3-1. DSP settings.
f 0Hz=
f 0.4Hz=
![Page 68: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/68.jpg)
Chapter 3: Fast Measurement of Quantization Distortions
52
To inspect the quantization effect on the filter coefficients, the FRF is calculated for every
phase realization by dividing the measured output spectrum by the input spectrum at the
excited frequencies. Then, these FRFs are averaged over all the phase realizations. The
following definition is used:
(3-2)
is the measured transfer function of the DUT:
(3-3)
with and the DFT of the input and output signals, respectively:
(3-4)
The measured transfer function can now be compared with the designed one (see Figure 3-3)
for both truncation methods. Since the quantization error of the coefficients results in
displaced system poles, the realized transfer functions (full grey lines) differ from the
designed one (black line). Furthermore, the amplitude of the complex model errors (dashed
grey lines) are shown on the same plot. From Figure 3-3, we conclude that rounding should
be used in this particular example in order to implement a filter with a transfer function that is
as close as possible to the designed transfer function in the pass-band. Hence, we will
continue the analysis in the following sections with the rounded coefficients.
(a) Floor (b) Round
½ lsb
Figure 3-2. Truncation characteristics.
xd t( ) x tTs( )= t 1 2 … N, , ,=
X DFT x( )= X l( ) 1N---- xd t( )e
j2πtl–N
---------------
t 1=
N
∑=⇔
G
G kf0( )Y kf0( )U kf0( )----------------= k excited frequency lines=
U Y
U DFT u( )= Y DFT y( )=
![Page 69: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/69.jpg)
DSP Errors
53
3.3.2 Finite Precision Distortion
The level of nonlinear distortions at the output, due to the finite precision of the arithmetic
and the storage operations, is investigated from the same data that was used to calculate .
In Figure 3-4 (a) and (b), the output spectrum is plotted as a function of the frequency for the
rounding and floor operation, respectively. At the non excited lines in these plots, crosses
represent the even contributions, and circles denote the odd contributions. Next, the
distortion level at these lines is extrapolated to the excited lines. Hence, the Signal to
Distortion Ratio (SDR) on the latter can be determined. At the even detection lines, the even
nonlinearities (e.g. ) pop up, and at the odd detection lines, the odd nonlinearities (e.g.
) are visible. From Figure 3-4 (a) and Figure 3-4 (b), it can be seen that the rounding
method only leads to odd nonlinearities, while the floor operation leads to both odd and even
nonlinearities. This behaviour can be explained by the symmetry properties of the truncation
characteristics (see Figure 3-2). The rounding operation is an odd function:
. If this function was decomposed in its Taylor series, it would only
consist of odd terms. The following properties hold for odd functions:
• the sum of two odd functions is odd;
• the multiplication of an odd function with a constant number is odd;
• the cascade of odd functions results in an odd function;
0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.460
40
20
0
Best
Lin
ear
Appro
xim
ation [
dB]
Frequency [Hz]
Ideal
Round
Floor
Figure 3-3. Distortion of the transfer function due to quantized filter coefficients.
G
x2
x3
Round x–( ) Round x( )–=
![Page 70: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/70.jpg)
Chapter 3: Fast Measurement of Quantization Distortions
54
The filtering operation performed by the DUT consists in subsequent additions and
multiplications with constant numbers (i.e., the filter coefficients). That is why at the output of
the system only odd nonlinearities are seen when rounding is used as a truncation method.
The floor operation is neither an odd, nor an even nonlinear operation. This leads to even and
odd terms when this function is decomposed in its Taylor Series. As a result, odd and even
nonlinearities are both observed in the output spectrum. Figure 3-4 (b) also shows the
presence of a DC component corresponding to the offset of ½ lsb that is introduced by the
flooring operation (see Figure 3-2).
In the pass band, we observe that for this RMS level the SDR due to the finite precision effects
is about 60 dB.
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.560
40
20
0
20
40O
utp
ut
Spect
rum
[dB]
Frequency [Hz]
(a) Round
Excited
Odd Detection
Even Detection
Figure 3-4. Output spectrum of a single multisine for different truncation methods.
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.560
40
20
0
20
40
Outp
ut
Spect
rum
[dB]
Frequency [Hz]
(b) Floor
Excited
Odd Detection
Even Detection
![Page 71: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/71.jpg)
DSP Errors
55
3.3.3 Finite Range Distortion
Finally, the effects of the limited dynamic range of the numeric representation are discussed.
Two approaches can be used to deal with this problem. First, when no precautions are taken
and when the value of the samples exceeds the allowed dynamic range, a two’s complement
overflow will occur. The resulting transfer characteristic is given in Figure 3-5.
A second and better method to deal with the limited range is to detect and to saturate the
representation. This leads to the characteristic given in Figure 3-6.
In the following simulation experiment, the RMS value of the input signal is increased with a
factor 3, up to 983 lsb. Figure 3-7 shows heavy distortion of the transfer function in the case
of two’s complement overflow, while in the case of saturation the distortion is much lower.
In Figure 3-8 (a) and (b), the level of nonlinear distortion at the output is analysed, using the
same data as before.
Range
Figure 3-5. Transfer characteristic for two’s complement overflow.
Range
Figure 3-6. Transfer characteristic for saturation overflow.
![Page 72: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/72.jpg)
Chapter 3: Fast Measurement of Quantization Distortions
56
0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4
40
30
20
10
0Best
Lin
ear
Appro
xim
ation [
dB]
Frequency [Hz]
Ideal
Saturation
Overflow
Figure 3-7. Transfer function for finite range.
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
20
0
20
40
60
Outp
ut
Spect
rum
[dB]
Frequency [Hz]
(a) Saturation
Excited
Odd Detection
Even Detection
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
20
0
20
40
60
Outp
ut
Spect
rum
[dB]
Frequency [Hz]
(b) Two’s Complement Overflow
Excited
Odd Detection
Even Detection
Figure 3-8. Output spectrum of a single multisine for different overflow methods.
![Page 73: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/73.jpg)
DSP Errors
57
We observe the presence of a small nonlinear contribution at the even detection lines. This is
caused by the asymmetry of the fixed point representation: the largest positive number is
, while the largest negative number is . Consequently, the relation
does not hold for all (neither for the saturation, nor for the
two’s complement overflow), resulting in a nonlinear behaviour that is not strictly odd. Thus,
when rounding is used to truncate the numbers, the even distortions in the output spectrum
can only be caused by an overflow event. Hence, the even detection lines can act as a
warning flag for internal overflows.
3.3.4 Influence of the Implementation
The method presented here is also appropriate to evaluate the relative performance of
different types of implementations. In the following experiment, we compare three types of
implementations: ordinary Direct Form II, a cascade of Second Order Sections (SOS)
optimized to reduce the probability of overflow, and a cascade of SOS reducing the round-off
noise. The results for the different implementations are shown in Figure 3-9. For this
particular system and RMS value of the input signal (328 lsb), the Direct Form II system
shows the smallest quantization noise.
27 2 8–– 27–
Overflow x–( ) Overflow x( )–= x
![Page 74: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/74.jpg)
Chapter 3: Fast Measurement of Quantization Distortions
58
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
20
0
20
40
Outp
ut
Spect
rum
[dB]
Frequency [Hz]
(a) DF II
Excited
Odd Detection
Even Detection
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
20
0
20
40
Outp
ut
Spect
rum
[dB]
Frequency [Hz]
(b) SOS Overflow
Excited
Odd Detection
Even Detection
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
20
0
20
40
Outp
ut
Spect
rum
[dB]
Frequency [Hz]
(c) SOS Round off
Excited
Odd Detection
Even Detection
Figure 3-9. Output spectrum of a single multisine for different implementations.
![Page 75: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/75.jpg)
Quality Analysis of Audio Codecs
59
3.4 Quality Analysis of Audio CodecsThe method described above can also be applied to the encoding and decoding of music in a
compressed format, for instance MP3. Although the coding/decoding process cannot be
considered as strictly time-invariant, we can still use the multisine technique to have an idea
of the level of distortion that arises. This makes it easy to compare different codecs with
identical bit rates, or different bit rates for the same codec. Of course, the psycho-acoustic
models employed in the encoding process can only be rated through subjective listening tests;
they are not considered here. Such models are used to determine the spectral music
components that are less audible to the human ear. This effect is caused by the so-called
masking effect: the human ear is less sensitive to small spectral components residing in the
proximity of large spectral components. The codec takes advantage of this shortcoming in
order to achieve higher compression ratios [31].
Since MP3 codecs are designed to handle music, it would be more interesting to use a music
sample instead of a multisine signal. However, the benefits of even and odd detection lines
are still needed. Detection lines in a music sample can easily be achieved with the following
procedure. Consider the music sample vector and the following anti-symmetrical sequence:
, (3-5)
where denotes a set of zero samples with the same length as vector . For such a
sequence, all the frequency lines which are a multiple of 2 or 3 of the fundamental frequency
will be zero. Hence, they will serve as detection lines for the odd and even nonlinearities.
The LAME MP3 codec (version 1.30, engine 3.92 [88]) is used in this example. The input
signal is a monophonic music sequence, sampled at 44.1 kHz with 16 bits per sample. In
order to have a representative set of data, an excerpt of samples from a pop song is
used. After applying the above procedure (3-5) to create detection lines, the length of the test
sequence is increased to about samples. In order not to overload the figures, the
number of plotted points in Figure 3-10 has been reduced.
The level of distortion for three bit rates (64 kbps, 128 kbps and 256 kbps) is plotted at the
left hand side of Figure 3-10. For the 64 kbps encoding/decoding process, the distortion level
lies 30 dB below the signal level for low frequencies. The results for 128 kbps and 256 kbps
show that the distortion level decreases with about 10 dB per additional 64 kbps.
x
x x 0 x[ ] x– x– 0 x[ ]
0 x[ ] x
220
6 106⋅
![Page 76: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/76.jpg)
Chapter 3: Fast Measurement of Quantization Distortions
60
102
103
104
40
20
0
20
40
60
80
64 k
bps
Am
plit
ude [
dB]
Distortion Level
Excited
Odd Detection
Even Detection
102
103
104
15
0
15
Phase
[º]
10
0
10
Best Linear Approximation
Am
plit
ude [
dB]
102
103
104
40
20
0
20
40
60
80
128 k
bps
Am
plit
ude [
dB]
102
103
104
15
0
15
Phase
[º]
10
0
10
Am
plit
ude [
dB]
102
103
104
40
20
0
20
40
60
80
Frequency [Hz]
256 k
bps
Am
plit
ude [
dB]
102
103
104
15
0
15
Frequency [Hz]
Phase
[º]
10
0
10
Am
plit
ude [
dB]
Figure 3-10. MP3 coding/decoding distortion and the BLA for different bit rates.
![Page 77: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/77.jpg)
Quality Analysis of Audio Codecs
61
Furthermore, the Best Linear Approximation is computed for the three bit rates and plotted at
the right hand side of Figure 3-10. We see a flat amplitude spectrum and a zero phase, as
expected. The variations in the amplitude spectrum for the lowest bit rate are probably
caused by the effect of masking (which lines are masked is decided by the psycho-acoustic
model of the encoder). It can also be observed that in the encoding process for 64 and
128 kbps, a low pass characteristic is present (cut-off frequencies of 14 kHz and 18 kHz,
respectively). Consequently, the MP3 codec cuts off the high frequencies when low bit rates
are used.
![Page 78: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/78.jpg)
Chapter 3: Fast Measurement of Quantization Distortions
62
3.5 ConclusionIn this chapter, we showed that it is possible to identify and quantify many non-idealities that
occur in DSP systems, using custom designed multisines. The proposed concepts allow to
verify quickly whether the input range and the quantization level are well chosen for input
signals with a certain pdf and power spectrum. We have illustrated the ideas for an IIR
system, for which the impact of the filter coefficient quantization, the presence of round-off
noise, the overflow behaviour, and the effect of the chosen implementation can easily be
measured and compared with the design specifications. Finally, the method was successfully
applied to analyse the performance of an audio compression/decompression process.
![Page 79: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/79.jpg)
63
CHAPTER 4
IDENTIFICATION OF NONLINEAR
FEEDBACK SYSTEMS
In this chapter, a method is proposed to estimate block-oriented
models which are composed of a linear, time-invariant system and a
static nonlinearity in the feedback loop. By rearranging the model’s
structure and by imposing one delay tab for the linear system, the
identification process is reduced to a linear problem allowing a fast
estimation of the feedback parameters. The numerical parameter
values obtained by solving the linear problem are then used as
starting values for the nonlinear optimization. Finally, the proposed
method is illustrated on measurements from a physical system.
![Page 80: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/80.jpg)
Chapter 4: Identification of Nonlinear Feedback Systems
64
4.1 Introduction
Many physical systems contain, in an implicit manner, a nonlinear feedback. Consider for
example a mass-spring-damper system with a nonlinear, hardening spring. For this system,
the differential equation describing the displacement of the mass is given by
, (4-1)
where is the input force and is the damping coefficient. The constants and
characterize the behaviour of the hardening spring ( ).
To demonstrate the implicit feedback behaviour of this system, equation (4-1) is rewritten as
follows
. (4-2)
The model structure which corresponds to this equation is shown in Figure 4-1. In this block
scheme, is the Laplace transfer function between the input signal and the output
signal of the system. The nonlinear block contains a static nonlinearity and
represents the term which is fed back in a negative way.
In the following sections, we will develop an identification procedure for this kind of Nonlinear
Feedback systems.
yc t( ) m
my··c t( ) dy·c t( ) k1yc t( ) k3yc3 t( )+ + + uc t( )=
uc t( ) d k1 k3
k3 0>
my··c t( ) dy·c t( ) k1yc t( )+ + uc t( ) k3yc3 t( )–=
G s( ) uc t( )
yc t( ) NL
k3yc3 t( )
+
-G s( )uc t( ) yc t( )+
NL
Figure 4-1. LTI system with static nonlinear feedback.
![Page 81: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/81.jpg)
Model Structure
65
4.2 Model Structure
For a band-limited input signal (for which the power spectrum for
), the linear system can be approximated in the frequency domain by a
discrete-time model
, (4-3)
provided that the sampling frequency is sufficiently high such that no aliasing occurs. To
this matter, note that the bandwidth of is possibly higher than the bandwidth of the
input signal. This is due to the nonlinearity which is present in the feedback loop. The relation
between the discrete-time signals and and the continuous-time signals and , for a
given sampling period , is described by the following equations
(4-4)
The relation between input and output is then given by
. (4-5)
The static nonlinearity is represented by a polynomial
. (4-6)
The vector , which contains all the model parameters, is defined as
. (4-7)
The proposed model structure to identify the system is shown in Figure 4-2. The set of
difference equations that describe the input/output relation is given by
uc t( ) Suu ω( ) 0=
ω ωmax> G s( )
G z θL,( )biz
i–
i 0=
nb
∑ajz
j–
j 0=
na∑-----------------------------= and θL a b,( )=
fs
yc t( )
u y uc yc
Ts
u t( ) uc tTs( )=
y t( ) yc tTs( )=⎩⎨⎧
u t( ) y t( )
y t( ) G z θL,( )u t( )=
fNL
fNL x( ) plxl
l 0=
r
∑= and θNL p=
θ
θ θL θNL,( )=
![Page 82: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/82.jpg)
Chapter 4: Identification of Nonlinear Feedback Systems
66
(4-8)
Without losing generality, we divide the first equation by , or equivalently, set . We
then substitute the second equation of (4-8) into the first one, and get
. (4-9)
We isolate the terms in and move them to the left hand side:
. (4-10)
This equation is an example of a nonlinear algebraic loop [41]: a nonlinear algebraic equation
should be solved for every time step when the model output is calculated. In principle, this
problem can be tackled by a numeric solver. The disadvantage of this loop is that it can have
multiple solutions. In fact, it is even possible that no solution exists when the degree is
even. As an example, let us take a look at the polynomial shown in Figure 4-3. The black
curve is a polynomial of third degree; it corresponds to the left hand side of (4-10). The grey
horizontal levels represent possible values of the right hand side of (4-10). In this example,
ajy t j–( )
j 0=
na
∑ bix t i–( )
i 0=
nb
∑=
x t( ) u t( ) plyl
t( )
l 0=
r
∑–=⎩⎪⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎪⎧
+-
G z θL,( )u t( ) y t( )
NL θNL( )
Figure 4-2. Model structure.
x t( )+
a0 a0 1≡
y t( ) biu t i–( )
i 0=
nb
∑ ajy t j–( )
j 1=
na
∑– bi plyl t i–( )
l 0=
r
∑i 0=
nb
∑–=
yl
t( )
y k[ ] b0 plyl k[ ]
l 0=
r
∑+ biu k i–[ ]
i 0=
nb
∑ ajy k j–[ ]
j 1=
na
∑– bi plyl k i–[ ]
l 0=
r
∑i 1=
nb
∑–=
t
r
![Page 83: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/83.jpg)
Model Structure
67
we observe that according to the horizontal level, the number of solutions varies: one solution
for the solid grey line, two solutions for the dotted line, and three solutions for the dash
dotted line. Although should be a good initial guess leading the numeric solver to the
correct solution, we prefer to avoid multiple solutions. To do this in a simple way, we will
impose one delay tab for the linear block or, equivalently, in equation (4-10) will be set to
zero. Taking into account the imposed delay, we obtain the following model equation
. (4-11)
y t 1–( )
Figure 4-3. Number of solutions of the algebraic equation.
b0
y t( ) biu t i–( )
i 1=
nb
∑ ajy t j–( )
j 1=
na
∑– bi plyl t i–( )
l 0=
r
∑i 1=
nb
∑–=
![Page 84: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/84.jpg)
Chapter 4: Identification of Nonlinear Feedback Systems
68
4.3 Estimation Procedure
A three step procedure is used to identify the parameters of the model equations (4-11). In
the first step, the parameters of the linear model are identified. Next, the coefficients of the
static nonlinearity are estimated. Finally, a nonlinear search procedure is employed in order to
refine the initial values obtained in the first two steps.
4.3.1 Best Linear Approximation
The first step in the identification process consists in estimating the Best Linear Approximation
(BLA) from the measured input and output for (see “Estimating the
Best Linear Approximation” on p. 28). A parametric linear model is then estimated in the -
domain and denoted as . Note that the linear behaviour of the nonlinear
feedback branch is implicitly included in the estimated BLA (see Figure 4-4).
4.3.2 Nonlinear Feedback
In the second step, the nonlinear block which is present in the feedback branch is identified.
To achieve this, the feedback loop is opened, and the model is restructured as shown in
Figure 4-5. In order to keep the identification simple, the measured output is used at
the input of the block. The idea of using measured outputs instead of estimated outputs
in order to avoid recurrence, is similar to the series-parallel architecture from the identification
of neural networks [47].
um t( ) ym t( ) t 1 …N,=
Z
GBLA z θL,( )
Lin NL( )
NL (NL)
+
-uc t( ) yc t( )+
-
Lin(NL)
GBLA z θL,( )
Figure 4-4. The BLA (grey box) of a Nonlinear Feedback system.
+ + G s( )
ym t( )
NL
![Page 85: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/85.jpg)
Estimation Procedure
69
As will be shown in what follows, opening the loop allows the formulation of an estimation
problem that is linear-in-the-parameters for a fixed . From Figure 4-5, we
obtain the following equation
. (4-12)
The residual is defined as
, (4-13)
where and are the measured input and output, respectively. Note that is
independent of the parameters . Next, the error needs to be minimized:
. (4-14)
To achieve this, the least squares cost function
(4-15)
is minimized with respect to .
θNL GBLA z θL,( )
y t( ) GBLA z θL,( ) u t( ) plyl t( )
l 0=
r
∑–
⎝ ⎠⎜ ⎟⎜ ⎟⎜ ⎟⎛ ⎞
=
w t( )
NL
+
-GBLA z θL,( )u t( ) y t( )
y t( )
Figure 4-5. Rearranged model structure.
+
w t( ) ym t( ) GBLA z θL,( )um t( )–≡
um t( ) ym t( ) w t( )
θNL ew t θNL,( )
ew t θNL,( ) w t( ) G– BLA z θL,( ) plyml t( )
l 0=
r
∑⎝ ⎠⎜ ⎟⎜ ⎟⎛ ⎞
⎝ ⎠⎜ ⎟⎜ ⎟⎛ ⎞
–=
V θNL( )
V θNL( ) ew t θNL,( )2
t 1=
N
∑=
pi
![Page 86: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/86.jpg)
Chapter 4: Identification of Nonlinear Feedback Systems
70
Since is a known linear operator, independent of , this minimization is a
problem that is linear-in-the-parameters which can be solved in the time or frequency domain.
Its solution is given by the matrix equation
, (4-16)
with
, (4-17)
and where and are vectors that contain the elements and for
, respectively. In (4-17), the power should be computed elementwise, and the
operator should be applied to all the columns. The pseudo-inverse can be
calculated in a numerical stable way via a Singular Value Decomposition (SVD) [27]. Since
measurements are used in the observation matrix of this linear least squares problem, a
bias is present on the estimated parameters [56]. However, when the Signal to Noise
Ratio (SNR) achieved by the measurement set-up is reasonable, this bias remains small,
yielding results that are well enough to initialize the nonlinear search procedure.
4.3.3 Nonlinear Optimization
The starting values obtained from the initialization procedure can be improved by solving the
full nonlinear estimation problem. The Levenberg-Marquardt algorithm (see “The Levenberg-
Marquardt Algorithm” on p. 135) is used to minimize the weighted least squares cost function
, (4-18)
where is a user-chosen, frequency domain weighting matrix. The model error
is defined as
, (4-19)
where and are the DFT of the measured and modelled output from equation
(4-11), respectively. Hence, the cost function is formulated in the frequency domain, which
GBLA z θL,( ) θNL
θNL H+w=
H G– BLA z θL,( ) ym0 ym
1 … ymr
⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞=
w ym w t( ) ym t( )
t 1 … N, ,=
GBLA z θL,( ) H+
H
θNL
VWLS θ( ) W k( ) ε k θ,( ) 2
k 1=
F
∑=
W k( ) �∈
ε k θ,( ) �∈
ε k θ,( ) Ym k θ,( ) Y k( )–=
Ym k θ,( ) Y k( )
![Page 87: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/87.jpg)
Estimation Procedure
71
enables the use of nonparametric weighting. Typically, the weighting matrix is chosen
equal to the inverse covariance matrix of the output . This matrix can be obtained
straightforwardly when periodic signals are used to excite the DUT.
In two different situations, leakage can appear in equation (4-19): when arbitrary excitations
are employed, or when subharmonics are present in the measured or modelled output. In the
first case, the leakage can be reduced by windowing techniques, or by increasing the length
of the data record. In the second case, it suffices to increase the DFT window length such that
an integer number of periods are measured in the window.
The Levenberg-Marquardt algorithm requires the computation of the derivatives of the model
error to the model parameters . The analytical expressions of the Jacobian are given in
Appendix 4.A. In these expressions, the modelled outputs are utilized instead of the measured
outputs. Hence, the bias which was present in the previous section due to the noise on the
output is now removed.
W k( )
CY1–
k( )
θ
![Page 88: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/88.jpg)
Chapter 4: Identification of Nonlinear Feedback Systems
72
4.4 Experimental Results
We will now apply the ideas of the previous sections to a practical measurement set-up. The
Device Under Test is an electronic circuit, also known as the Silverbox [67], which emulates
the behaviour of a mass-spring-damper system with a nonlinear spring. The experimental
data originate from a single measurement and contain two main parts. In all experiments, the
input and output signals are measured at a sampling frequency of 10 MHz/214 = 610.35 Hz.
The first part of the data is a filtered Gaussian signal with a RMS value that increases linearly
with time. This sequence consists of 40 700 samples and has a bandwidth of 200 Hz; it will be
used for validation purposes. Note that the amplitude of the validation sequence exceeds the
amplitude of the estimation sequence. A warning is in place here: generally speaking,
extrapolation during the validation test should be avoided, since it reveals no information
about the model quality. Good extrapolation performance, certainly in a black box framework,
is often a matter of luck: the model structure happens to correspond exactly to the system’s
internal structure. The second part of the data consists of ten consecutive realizations of a
random phase multisine with 8192 samples and 500 transient points per realization, depicted
in Figure 4-6 with alternating colours. The bandwidth of the excitation signal is also 200 Hz
and its RMS value is 22.3 mV. The multisines will be employed to estimate the model. In this
measurement, odd multisines were used:
(4-20)
Figure 4-6. Excitation signal that consists of a validation and an estimation set.
0 50 100 150 200
0.15
0.1
0.05
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
Input
Sig
nal [V
]
Time [s]
EstimationValidation
Uk A= k 2n 1+= n �∈
Uk 0= elsewhere
![Page 89: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/89.jpg)
Experimental Results
73
using the same symbols as in equation (2-3). The phases were chosen uniformly
distributed over . We will extract the BLA of the DUT by averaging the measured
transfer functions for different phase realizations of the multisine [56],[62],[66]. Note that
this also diminishes the measurement noise on the BLA.
4.4.1 Linear Model
We will start with a comparison of two second order linear models. The first model has
completely unrestricted parameters. For the second model, we impose one delay tab which is
equivalent to forcing to zero during the estimation. As mentioned before, this delay is
imposed in order to avoid an algebraical loop. Furthermore, the order of the numerator is
increased to reduce the model error. The consequences of the delay are now investigated by
comparing the quality of the following models:
1. Full linear model:
(4-21)
2. Linear model with imposed delay:
(4-22)
The estimation of the parameters of and for the DUT is carried out in the
frequency domain, using the ELiS Frequency Domain Identification toolbox [56]. The resulting
models are plotted in Figure 4-7 (dash dotted and dashed grey lines, respectively), together
with the BLA (solid black line). From this figure, it can be seen that imposing a delay results in
a slight distortion of the modelled transfer function for high frequencies. The following step
consists in validating these models by using the validation data set. The simulation error
signals of the linear models are plotted in Figure 4-8 (b) and (c), together with the measured
output signal (a). From these plots, we conclude that the same model quality is achieved for
both linear models: the Root Mean Square Error (RMSE) obtained with the validation data set
is 14.3 mV. This means that imposing a delay tab does not significantly deteriorate the quality
of the linear model in this particular experimental set-up.
φk
[0 2π, )
b0
G1 z( )b0 b1z 1– b2z 2–+ +
a0 a1z 1– a2z 2–+ +----------------------------------------------=
G2 z( )b1z 1– b2z 2– b3z 3– b4z 4– b5z 5–+ + + +
a0 a1z 1– a2z 2–+ +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------=
G1 z( ) G2 z( )
![Page 90: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/90.jpg)
Chapter 4: Identification of Nonlinear Feedback Systems
74
0 50 100 15020
10
0
10
20
Am
plit
ude [
dB]
0 50 100 150
150
100
50
0
Phase
[°]
Frequency [Hz]
Figure 4-7. Measured FRF (solid black line),model (dash dotted grey line) and model (dashed grey line).G1 z( ) G2 z( )
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0.2
0
0.2
(a)
Measured Output Signal [V]
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0.2
0
0.2
Error Linear Model 1 RMSE: 14.3 mV
(b)
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0.2
0
0.2
Error Linear Model 2 RMSE: 14.3 mV
(c)
Time [s]
Figure 4-8. Validation of the linear models.
![Page 91: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/91.jpg)
Experimental Results
75
The estimated coefficients of the second linear model are
. (4-23)
We now proceed with the identification procedure using the second linear model and by
extending it with the static nonlinear feedback branch (see Figure 4-2).
4.4.2 Estimation of the Nonlinear Feedback Coefficients
After estimating the linear transfer characteristics, the nonlinear feedback coefficients are
estimated in the time domain, using the ten measured multisine realizations. Several degrees
were tried out, and yielded the best result. The identified coefficients are
. (4-24)
Again, the model is validated on the Gaussian noise sequence. Figure 4-9 (a) shows the
simulation error of the Nonlinear Feedback model. Note that the vertical scale is enlarged 10
times compared with the plots in Figure 4-8. The RMSE has dropped with more than a factor
10 compared to the linear model. Furthermore in Figure 4-9 (a), the large spikes in the error
signal have disappeared.
b 0 0.4838 0.0987– 0.1217 -0.0782 0.0257 ,= a 1 -1.4586 0.9323=
p
r r 1 : 3=
p -0.0347 -0.0260 3.9177=
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0.02
0
0.02
Simulation error NLFB model RMSE: 1.01 mV
(a)
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0.02
0
0.02
Simulation error NLFB model, optimized RMSE: 0.77 mV
(b)
Time [s]
Figure 4-9. Validation of the nonlinear models.
![Page 92: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/92.jpg)
Chapter 4: Identification of Nonlinear Feedback Systems
76
4.4.3 Nonlinear Optimization
The proposed identification procedure significantly enhances the results compared to the
linear model. But, we can achieve even better results by applying the nonlinear optimization
method from section 4.3.3. Since no covariance information is available from the measured
data, a constant weighting is employed. The resulting simulation error after applying the
Levenberg-Marquardt algorithm is plotted in Figure 4-9 (b). The RMSE then decreases further
with about 20% to 0.77 mV.
4.4.4 Upsampling
To obtain a further improvement of the modelling results, we will upsample the input and
output data. The idea behind upsampling is that the influence of the delay, which is imposed
artificially and which is one sample period long, is reduced. Hence, the model quality should
improve.
After upsampling the input and output data with a factor 2, the estimation procedure
described in the previous sections is applied. The simulation error of the Nonlinear Feedback
model is shown in Figure 4-10 (a). We observe indeed that the validation test yields better
results: the RMS error has decreased to 0.70 mV. In addition, a nonlinear search routine is
used to optimize the parameters, resulting in a simulation error of 0.38 mV (Figure 4-10 (b)).
The modelling results are summarized in Table 4-1. The linear models and the linear parts of
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0.02
0
0.02
Simulation error NLFB model, P=2 RMSE: 0.7 mV
(a)
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0.02
0
0.02
Simulation error NLFB model, P=2, optimized RMSE: 0.38 mV
(b)
Time [s]
Figure 4-10. Validation of the nonlinear models for upsampled data.
![Page 93: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/93.jpg)
Experimental Results
77
the Nonlinear Feedback models are all of order , ; the degree of the
polynomial is set to . From Table 4-1, we conclude that by extending the linear
model with a static nonlinear feedback, the simulation error on the validation data set is
reduced by more than 20 dB: from 14.3 mV to 1.01 mV. The nonlinear optimization slightly
improves this result down to 0.77 mV. Furthermore, using upsampling the total error
reduction increases to more than 30 dB compared to the linear model. Finally, the simulation
error of the optimized nonlinear model using the upsampled data set decreases to 0.38 mV.
For a comparison with other modelling approaches on the same DUT, using the same data
set, we refer to the Silverbox case study in Chapter 6 (see “Comparison with Other
Approaches” on p. 151).
Model RMSE Validation
Linear 14.3 mV
Linear + delay 14.3 mV
NLFB, =610 Hz 1.01 mV
NLFB, =610 Hz (optimized) 0.77 mV
NLFB, =1221 Hz 0.70 mV
NLFB, =1221 Hz (optimized) 0.38 mV
Table 4-1. Summary of the modelling results.
na 2= nb 5= r
r 1 : 3=
fs
fs
fs
fs
![Page 94: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/94.jpg)
Chapter 4: Identification of Nonlinear Feedback Systems
78
In Figure 4-11, the amplitude spectrum of the simulation errors of the various models is
shown, together with the measured output spectrum (solid black line). The solid grey line
represents the error of the (unrestricted) linear model. The grey and black dots represent the
Nonlinear Feedback model errors with and without upsampling, respectively.
0 50 100 150 200 250 30030
20
10
0
10
20
30
40Am
plit
ude [
dB]
Frequency [Hz]
Figure 4-11. Spectrum of the measured output (solid black line); linear model error (solid grey line); NLFB model error (black dots);
NLFB model error for upsampled data (grey dots).
![Page 95: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/95.jpg)
Conclusion
79
4.5 Conclusion
The technique proposed in this chapter provides a practical and fast way to model systems
that are composed of a linear, time-invariant system and a static nonlinear feedback. The
estimated model gives satisfying modelling results, which can be further improved by applying
a nonlinear optimization procedure. We have applied the method on experimental data, and
obtained good results. The modelling error was significantly reduced to less than 3% of the
error obtained with an ordinary linear model.
![Page 96: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/96.jpg)
Chapter 4: Identification of Nonlinear Feedback Systems
80
Appendix 4.A Analytic Expressions for the JacobianRecall equation (4-11) which describes the Nonlinear Feedback model
. (4-25)
In order to use the Levenberg-Marquardt algorithm, we need to compute the derivatives of
the output to the model parameters, i.e., the Jacobian. The Jacobian elements are defined as:
(4-26)
Finally, we obtain:
(4-27)
y k( ) biu k i–( ) biplyl k i–( ) ajy k j–( )
j 1=
na
∑–
l 1=
r
∑i 1=
nb
∑+
i 1=
nb
∑=
Jbnk( ) y k( )∂
bn∂-------------≡ Jan
k( ) y k( )∂an∂
-------------≡ Jpnk( ) y k( )∂
pn∂-------------≡
Jbnk( ) u k n–( ) ply
lk n–( )
l 1=
r
∑ plbilyl 1– k i–( )Jbn
k i–( )
l 1=
r
∑i 1=
nb
∑ ajJbnk j–( )
j 1=
na
∑–+ +=
Jank( ) y k n–( )– plbily
l 1– k i–( )Jank i–( )
l 1=
r
∑i 1=
nb
∑ ajJank j–( )
j 1=
na
∑+ +=
Jpnk( ) biy
n k i–( )
i 1=
nb
∑ plbilyl 1– k i–( )Jpn
k i–( )
l 1=
r
∑i 1=
nb
∑ ajJpnk j–( )
j 1=
na
∑–+=
⎩⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎧
![Page 97: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/97.jpg)
81
CHAPTER 5
NONLINEAR STATE SPACE
MODELLING OF MULTIVARIABLE
SYSTEMS
This chapter deals with the modelling of multivariable nonlinear
systems. We will compare a number of candidate model structures
and select the one that is most suitable for our modelling problem.
Next, the different classes of systems that can exactly be represented
by the selected model structure are discussed. Finally, an identification
procedure to determine the model parameters is presented.
![Page 98: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/98.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
82
5.1 IntroductionThe aim of this chapter is to model nonlinear Multiple Input, Multiple Output (MIMO) systems.
One way to achieve this is to examine the Device Under Test (DUT) thoroughly, and to build a
model using first principles: for instance, physics and chemistry laws. This process can be very
time-consuming, since it requires an exact knowledge about the system’s structure and all its
parameters. It also induces that the system should be fully understood, which is not always
feasible to achieve. Another way to tackle the modelling problem is to consider the system as
a black box. In that case, the only available information about the system is given by its
measured inputs and outputs. This approach usually means that no physical parameters or
quantities are estimated. Hence, no physical interpretation whatsoever can be given to the
model. Black box modelling implies the application of a model structure that is as flexible as
possible, since no information about the device’s internal structure is utilized. Often, this
flexibility results in a high number of parameters.
In this chapter, we will make use of discrete-time models. One of the arguments for this
choice is that, when looking to control applications, discrete-time descriptions are more
suitable since control actions are usually taken at discrete time instances. Furthermore, the
estimation of nonlinear continuous-time models is not a trivial task, and can be
computationally involved, because it may imply the calculation of time-derivatives or integrals
of sophisticated nonlinear functions of the measured signals [79]. Finally, it should be noted
that a continuous-time approach is not strictly necessary, since we are not interested in the
estimation of physical system parameters.
One of the objectives is to choose a model structure that is suitable for MIMO systems.
Hence, it is important that the common dynamics, present in the different outputs of the DUT,
are exploited in such a way that they result in a smaller number of model parameters. First, a
number of candidate model structures found in literature will be examined. Next, a specific
model structure will be selected, and the relation with some other model structures (standard
block-oriented nonlinear models, among others) will be investigated. Finally, an identification
procedure for the selected model structure will be proposed.
![Page 99: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/99.jpg)
The Quest for a Good Model Structure
83
5.2 The Quest for a Good Model Structure
The literature regarding nonlinear system identification is vast, and the number of available
model structures is practically unlimited. In order not to re-invent the wheel, we will briefly
discuss a number of candidate model structures, and pick the one that seems most adequate.
Initially, only deterministic models are considered: the presence of any kind of noise is
ignored. First, two popular examples of input/output models are considered. Volterra and
NARX models are both satisfying from a system theoretic viewpoint, and because of their
approximation capabilities.
5.2.1 Volterra Models
An introduction to Volterra series was already given in the first chapter (see “The Volterra-
Wiener Theory” on p. 4). Since we have chosen the Volterra-Wiener approach as a framework
for the Best Linear Approximation (see “Properties of the Best Linear Approximation” on
p. 21), it is a logical first step to consider Volterra models. These models have already been
employed in many application fields [43]: in video and image enhancement, speech
processing, communication channel equalization, and compensation of loudspeaker
nonlinearities.
The main advantage of Volterra series is their conceptual simplicity, because they can be
viewed as generalized LTI descriptions. Furthermore, they are open loop models for which the
stability is easy to check and to enforce. However, in the case of a nonparametric
representation, these benefits do not outweigh one important disadvantage: when identifying
discrete-time Volterra kernels, an enormous number of kernel coefficients needs to be
identified, even for a modest kernel degree. We illustrate this with a simple example of a SISO
Volterra model. Table 5-1 shows the number of kernel samples of two Volterra
functionals for a memory length of , and samples. Note that triangular/
regular kernels were considered in order to eliminate the redundancy of the kernel
coefficients. The number of effective kernel samples is then computed using the following
binomial coefficient [43] (see also Appendix 5.A):
, (5-1)
Nkern
N 10= N 100=
NkernN n 1–+
n⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞=
![Page 100: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/100.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
84
where is the kernel degree. Table 5-1 shows that the number of required kernel coefficients
increases dramatically for growing model degree and memory length. From this example, it is
clear that, despite the theoretical insights they provide, nonparametric Volterra functionals are
not useful in practical identification situations. However, the combinatorial growth of
can be tackled in various ways. For instance, a frequency domain IIR representation can be
employed for the kernels [61]. But, in a black box framework such a parametrization is not
straightforward, and poses a difficult model selection problem. Another solution is to apply
interpolation methods to approximate the kernels in the time or frequency domain. This
approach works well when the kernels exhibit a certain smoothness, see for instance [48].
The application of this idea leads to a significant decrease in parameters and, thus,
measurement time.
A multivariable Volterra model is, by definition, composed of different MISO models. When
these models are parametrized independently, no advantage is taken of the common
dynamics that appear in the different outputs. Consequently, such a representation does not
satisfy our needs, since we are looking for a more parsimonious model structure.
5.2.2 NARX Approach
To avoid the excessive numbers of parameters, NARX (Nonlinear AutoRegressive model with
eXogeneous inputs) models were intensively studied in the eighties, as an alternative for
Volterra series. The generic single input, single output NARX model is defined as
, (5-2)
where is an arbitrary nonlinear function of delayed inputs and outputs [7]. Contrary to
the Volterra approach, the model output is now also a function of delayed output
Degree
1 10 1002 55 50503 220 171 7004 715 4 421 275
Table 5-1. Number of kernel coefficients in a nonparametric representation,
as a function of the kernel degree and the memory length .
n N 10= N 100=
Nkern
n N
n
Nkern
ny
y t( ) f y t 1–( ) … y t ny–( ) u t 1–( ) … u t nu–( ), , , , ,( )=
f .( )
y t( )
![Page 101: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/101.jpg)
The Quest for a Good Model Structure
85
samples. This is very similar to the extension of linear FIR models to IIR models. This has two
important consequences. First of all, a longer memory length is achieved without suffering
from the dramatic increase in the number of parameters, as was observed with nonparametric
Volterra series. Secondly, due to the nonlinear feedback which is present, the stability analysis
becomes very difficult compared with Volterra models. This is the major price that is paid for
the increase in flexibility.
In [37], it is proven that a nonlinear discrete-time, time-invariant system can always be
represented by a general NARX model in a region around an equilibrium point, when it is
subject to two sufficient conditions:
• the response function of the system is finitely realizable (i.e., the state
space representation has a finite number of states);
• a linearised model exists when the system operates close to the chosen
equilibrium point.
Often, a more specific kind of NARX models is employed: polynomial NARX models. By
applying the Stone-Weierstrass Theorem [16], it was shown in [7] that these models can
approximate any sampled nonlinear system arbitrarily well, under the assumption that the
space of input and output signals is compact (i.e., bounded and closed).
The NARX model can also be used to handle multivariable systems. Just as with Volterra
models, multivariable NARX models are defined as a set of MISO NARX models:
(5-3)
with the output index, the number of inputs, the delay per output ,
and the maximum delay [37]. For this general nonlinear model, there is
no straightforward way to parametrize the functions , such that advantage is taken of the
yi t n+( ) fi y1 t n1 1–+( ) … y1 t( ) , , ,[=
…yny
t nny1–+( ) yny
t nny2–+( ) … yp t( ) , , , ,
u1 t n+( ) u1 t n 1–+( ) … u1 t( ) , , , ,
…unu
t n+( ) unut n 1–+( ) … unu
t( ), , , ]
i 1 … ny, ,= nu ni yi
n max n1 … np, ,( )=
fi
![Page 102: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/102.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
86
common dynamics present in the different outputs. Hence, we will investigate another class of
models than input/output models, namely state space models. It will turn out that the latter
are a very suitable description for multiple input, multiple output systems.
5.2.3 State Space Models
The most natural way to represent systems with multiple inputs and outputs is to use the
state space framework. In its most general form, a -th order discrete-time state space
model is expressed as
(5-4)
In these equations, is the vector that contains the input values at time
instance , and is the vector of the outputs. The state vector
represents the memory of the system, and contains the common dynamics present in the
different outputs. The use of this intermediary variable constitutes the essential difference
between state space and input/output models. For the latter, the memory is created by
utilizing delayed inputs or outputs. The first equation of (5-4), referred to as the state
equation, describes the evolution of the state as a function of the input and the previous
state. The second equation of (5-4) is called the output equation. It relates the system output
with the state and the input. Furthermore, the state space representation is not unique. By
means of a similarity transform, the model equations (5-4) can be converted into a new model
that exhibits exactly the same input/output behaviour. The similarity transform
with an arbitrary non-singular square matrix yields
(5-5)
Note that when the similarity transform is applied to arbitrary functions and , the resulting
functions and do not necessarily have the same form as and . This is illustrated in
the following example. Consider the output equation
, (5-6)
na
x t 1+( ) f x t( ) u t( ),( )=
y t( ) g x t( ) u t( ),( )=⎩⎨⎧
u t( ) �nu∈ nu
t y t( ) �∈ny
ny x t( ) �na∈
xT t( ) T 1– x t( )= T
xT t 1+( ) T 1– f TxT t( ) u t( ),( ) fT xT t( ) u t( ),( )= =
y t( ) g TxT t( ) u t( ),( ) gT xT t( ) u t( ),( )= =⎩⎨⎧
f g
fT gT f g
y t( ) ax1 t( )------------ bx2 t( )+=
![Page 103: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/103.jpg)
The Quest for a Good Model Structure
87
where and are the model parameters. When we define as the -th element of the
matrix , the similarity transform results in
, (5-7)
which obviously cannot be written in the form
. (5-8)
Hence, the similarity transform can have an influence on the model complexity. Whether the
similarity transform introduces redundancy in the representation, depends on the (fixed)
parametrization of and . However, this issue is not so important to us: all the state space
models discussed in this chapter retain their model structure under a similarity transform. In
what follows, we assume that and , such that is an
equilibrium state. In the following section, we describe different kinds of state space models.
A. Linear State Space Models
The model equations of the well-known linear state space model are given by
(5-9)
with the state space matrices , , , and .
The transfer function that corresponds to (5-9) is given by
, (5-10)
with the identity matrix of dimension . From (5-10), it is clear that the poles of
are given by the eigenvalues of . By means of a similarity transform, the set of state space
matrices can be converted into a new set that exhibits exactly the same
input/output behaviour. The similarity transform with an arbitrary non-
singular square matrix yields
a b tij i j,( )
T 1–
y t( ) at11x
1Tt( ) t12x
2Tt( )+
---------------------------------------------------- b t21x1T
t( ) t22x2T
t( )+( )+=
y t( )aT
x1T t( )--------------- bTx2T t( )+=
f g
f 0 0,( ) 0= h 0 0,( ) 0= x 0=
x t 1+( ) Ax t( ) Bu t( )+=
y t( ) Cx t( ) Du t( )+=⎩⎨⎧
A �na na×
∈ B �na nu×
∈ C �ny na×
∈ D �ny nu×
∈
G z( )
G z( ) C zInaA–( ) 1–
B D+=
Inana G z( )
A
ABCD ATBTCTDT
xT t( ) T 1– x t( )=
T
![Page 104: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/104.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
88
(5-11)
It is easily verified that the similarity transform has no influence on the transfer function:
(5-12)
B. Bilinear State Space Models
A continuous-time, bilinear state space model is defined as
(5-13)
where , , , , and are the
bilinear state space matrices. These models are a straightforward extension of linear state
space models, which enables them to cope with nonlinear systems. It was shown in the past
that, in continuous-time, these models are universal approximators for nonlinear systems
[26],[46]: any continuous causal functional can be approximated arbitrarily well by a
continuous-time, bilinear state space model within a bounded time interval. The discrete-time,
bilinear state space model is given by
(5-14)
Intuitively, it is expected that this model preserves the approximation capabilities of its
continuous-time counterpart. Unfortunately, this is not the case: it is not possible to
approximate all (nonlinear) discrete-time systems by discrete-time, bilinear models. The
reason for this is that the set of discrete-time, bilinear systems is not closed with respect to
the product operation: the product of the outputs of two discrete-time, bilinear state space
systems is not necessarily a bilinear system again [26]. In order to maintain the universal
AT T 1– AT= BT T 1– B= CT CT= DT D=
GT z( ) CT zInaAT–( ) 1–
BT DT+=
CT zInaT 1– AT–( )
1–T 1– B D+=
C zTT 1– TT 1– ATT 1––( )1–B D+=
G z( )=
xc t( )d
td-------------- Axc t( ) Buc t( ) Fxc t( ) uc t( )⊗+ +=
yc t( ) Cxc t( ) Duc t( )+=⎩⎪⎨⎪⎧
A �na na×
∈ B �na nu×
∈ C �ny na×
∈ D �ny nu×
∈ F �na nun
a×
∈
x t 1+( ) Ax t( ) Bu t( ) Fx t( ) u t( )⊗+ +=
y t( ) Cx t( ) Du t( )+=⎩⎨⎧
![Page 105: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/105.jpg)
The Quest for a Good Model Structure
89
approximation property also for discrete-time systems, a more generic class of models needs
to be defined: state affine models.
C. State Affine Models
A single input, single output, state affine model of degree is defined as
(5-15)
with , , , and . These models were
introduced in [73], and they pop up in a natural way in the description of sampled continuous-
time, bilinear systems [7],[59]. On a finite time interval and for bounded inputs, they can
approximate any continuous, discrete-time system arbitrarily well in uniform sense [26]. Just
as in the case of bilinear models, the states appear in the state and output equations in
an affine way. Hence, such a model structure enables the use of subspace identification
techniques to estimate the state space matrices [80].
D. Other Kinds of State Space Models
In literature, state space models come in many different flavours. In this section, we give a
non-exhaustive list of various existing approaches, and mention their most remarkable
properties.
The idea behind Linear Parameter Varying (LPV) models [80] is to create a linear, time-variant
model. Its parameters are a function of a user-chosen vector which characterizes
the operating point of the system, and which is assumed to be measurable. The state space
equations are an affine function of :
r
x t 1+( ) Aiui
t( )x t( )i 0=
r 1–
∑ Biui
t( )i 1=
r
∑+=
y t( ) Ciui
t( )x t( )i 0=
r 1–
∑ Diui
t( )i 1=
r
∑+=⎩⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎧
Ai �na na×
∈ Bi �na nu×
∈ Ci �ny na×
∈ Di �ny nu×
∈
x t( )
p t( ) �s∈
p t( )
![Page 106: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/106.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
90
(5-16)
with , and . The other state space matrices , , and
are partitioned in a similar way. Two special cases of the LPV model are the bilinear and the
state affine model. When is chosen equal to , and , , and
for , then the model equations become identical to the bilinear model equations
(5-14). The state affine description of degree is obtained from the LPV model by choosing
equal to a vector that contains all distinct nonlinear combinations of up to degree
. The LPV model structure is particularly interesting for nonlinear control: it enables the
use of different linear controllers at different operating points (i.e., gain scheduling).
Another kind of state space models are the so-called Local Linear Models (LLM) [80]. The idea
here is to partition the input space and the state space into operating regions in which a
particular linear model dominates. The state space matrices are defined as a sum of weighted
local linear models:
(5-17)
The scalar weighting functions generally have local support, like for instance radial basis
functions. The scheduling vector is a function of the input and the state .
The last type of nonlinear state space models discussed here are deterministic Neural State
Space models [77],[78]. The general nonlinear equations in (5-4) are parametrized by multi-
layer feedforward neural networks with hyperbolic tangents as activation functions:
(5-18)
x t 1+( ) A x t( )p t( ) x t( )⊗
B u t( )p t( ) u t( )⊗
+=
y t( ) C x t( )p t( ) x t( )⊗
D u t( )p t( ) u t( )⊗
+=⎩⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎧
A A0 A1 … As= Ai �na na×
∈ B C D
p t( ) u t( ) Bi 0= Ci 0= Di 0=
i 1 … s, ,=
r
p t( ) u t( )
r 1–
x t 1+( ) pi φt( ) Aix t( ) Biu t( ) Oi+ +( )i 1=
s
∑=
y t( ) pi φt( ) Cix t( ) Diu t( ) Pi+ +( )i 1=
s
∑=⎩⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎧
pi .( )
φt u t( ) x t( )
x t 1+( ) WABtanh VAx t( ) VBu t( ) βAB+ +( )=
y t( ) WCDtanh VCx t( ) VDu t( ) βCD+ +( )=⎩⎨⎧
![Page 107: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/107.jpg)
The Quest for a Good Model Structure
91
The model in (5-18) can be viewed as a multi-layer recurrent neural network with one hidden
layer. It is also a specific kind of NLq system, for which sufficient conditions for global
asymptotic stability were derived in [78]. Furthermore, the NLq theory allows to check and to
ensure the global asymptotic stability of neural control loops.
![Page 108: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/108.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
92
5.3 Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Models
The approach in this thesis consists in starting from the general model
(5-19)
and to apply a functional expansion of the functions and . For this, we need to
choose a set of basis functions out of the many possibilities: sigmoid functions, wavelets,
radial basis functions, polynomials, hyperbolic tangents,... We opted for a polynomial
approach. The main advantage of polynomial basis functions is that they are straightforward
to compute, and easy to apply in a multivariable framework. We propose the following
notation for the Polynomial NonLinear State Space (PNLSS) model:
(5-20)
The coefficients of the linear terms in and are given by the matrices
and in the state equation, and and in the output
equation. The vectors and contain monomials in and ; the
matrices and contain the coefficients associated with those
monomials. The separation between the linear and the nonlinear terms in (5-20) is of no
importance for the behaviour of the model. However, later on in the identification procedure
this distinction will turn out to be very practical. The reason for this is that the first stage of
the identification procedure consists of estimating a linear model.
First, we briefly summarize the multinomial expansion theorem and the graded lexicographic
order, which are both useful concepts when dealing with multivariable monomials.
5.3.1 Multinomial Expansion Theorem
In order to denote monomials in an uncomplicated way, we first define the -dimensional
multi-index which contains the powers of a multivariable monomial:
x t 1+( ) f x t( ) u t( ) θ, ,( )=
y t( ) g x t( ) u t( ) θ, ,( )=⎩⎨⎧
f .( ) g .( )
x t 1+( ) Ax t( ) Bu t( ) Eζ t( )+ +=
y t( ) Cx t( ) Du t( ) Fη t( )+ +=⎩⎨⎧
x t( ) u t( ) A �∈na na×
B �na nu×
∈ C �ny na×
∈ D �ny nu×
∈
ζ t( ) �∈nζ η t( ) �∈
nηx t( ) u t( )
E �∈na nζ×
F �ny nη×
∈
n
α
![Page 109: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/109.jpg)
Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Models
93
, (5-21)
with . A monomial composed of the components from the vector is then
simply written as
, (5-22)
where is the -th component of . The total degree of the monomial is given by
, (5-23)
and the factorial function of the multi-index is defined as
. (5-24)
Furthermore, we define as the column vector of all the distinct monomials of degree
(i.e., with multi-index ) composed from the elements of vector . The number of
elements in vector is given by the following binomial coefficient (see Appendix 5.A):
. (5-25)
Finally, the vector is defined as the column vector containing all the monomials of
degree two up to degree . The length of this vector is given by
. (5-26)
The notations introduced above can now be used to express the multinomial expansion
theorem [83].
α α1 α2 … αn=
αi �∈ ξ �n∈
ξα ξi
αi
i 1=
n
∏=
ξi i ξ
α αii 1=
n
∑=
α
α! α1!α2!…αn!=
ξ r( ) r
α r= ξ
ξ r( )
n r 1–+r⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞
ξ r{ }r
Ln r,n r+
r⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞ 1– n–=
![Page 110: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/110.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
94
Theorem 5.1 (Multinomial Expansion Theorem) The multinomial expansion
theorem gives an expression for the power of a sum, as a function of the powers of the
terms:
(5-27)
5.3.2 Graded Lexicographic Order
To assemble the monomials in a deterministic way, it is convenient to define an order of
succession among the monomials. A possible choice is to utilize the lexicographic (or
alphabetical) order. For this, a sequence is chosen between the symbols
. The most trivial choice is to base the ordering on the index of :
(5-28)
When the symbols are combined into a word, we arrange them according to this order. For
instance, the disordered monomial should be written as . Furthermore,
monomials of the same degree can be ordered like words in a dictionary, e.g.
. (5-29)
Monomials of different degrees are placed in groups of increasing degree. Within each
degree, the lexicographic order is applied. This results in the so-called graded lexicographic
order. We will use this to order the elements of the vector , which contains all monomials
with a degree between two and . For instance, the vector with denotes
(5-30)
5.3.3 Approximation Behaviour
When a full polynomial expansion of (5-19) is carried out, all monomials up to a chosen
degree must be taken into account. First, we define as the concatenation of the state
vector and the input vector:
ξii 1=
n
∑⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞ k k!
α!-----ξα
α k=∑=
ξ1{ } ξ2{ } … ξn{ }, , , i ξi
ξ1{ } ξ2{ } … ξn{ }< < <
ξi
ξ3ξ12ξ2 ξ1ξ1ξ2ξ3{ }
ξ1ξ1ξ2{ } ξ1ξ1ξ3{ } ξ2ξ2ξ3{ }< <
ξ r{ }r ξ 3{ } n 2=
ξ 3{ } ξ 2( ) ξ 3( );=
ξ12 ξ1ξ2 ξ2
2 ξ1
3 ξ1
2ξ2 ξ1ξ22 ξ2
3
T=
r ξ t( )
![Page 111: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/111.jpg)
Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Models
95
. (5-31)
As a consequence, the dimension of the vector is given by . Then, we
define and in equation (5-20) as
. (5-32)
This is our default choice for the PNLSS model structure. The total number of parameters
required by the model in (5-20) is given by
. (5-33)
When all the nonlinear combinations of the states are present in and for a given
degree, then the proposed model structure is invariant under a similarity transform. Since the
elements of the transform matrix can be chosen freely provided that is non singular,
the effective number of parameters becomes
. (5-34)
A. The PNLSS Approach versus State Affine Models
The question we want to answer is what the approximation properties are of this model
structure. When taking a closer look at (5-15) (“State Affine Models” on p. 89), we observe
that the State Affine (SA) representation forms a subclass of the default PNLSS model
structure. Therefore, the PNLSS model structure inherits its approximation properties from the
state affine framework. The remaining question is then what the additional advantage is of
the PNLSS approach over the state affine representation. To investigate this, we recapitulate a
derivation given in [59] for a SISO system. This derivation starts from a polynomial expansion
of degree of the general state space equations (5-19). This expansion is expressed by
Kronecker products:
ξ t( ) x1 t( ) … xnat( ) u1 t( ) … unu
t( )T
=
ξ t( ) n na nu+=
ζ t( ) η t( )
ζ t( ) η t( ) ξ t( ) r{ }= =
n r +
r⎝ ⎠⎜ ⎟⎛ ⎞
1–⎝ ⎠⎜ ⎟⎛ ⎞
na ny+( )na nu r+ +
r⎝ ⎠⎜ ⎟⎛ ⎞
1–⎝ ⎠⎜ ⎟⎛ ⎞
na ny+( )=
ζ t( ) η t( )
na2 T T
na nu r+ +
r⎝ ⎠⎜ ⎟⎛ ⎞
1–⎝ ⎠⎜ ⎟⎛ ⎞
na ny+( ) na2–
2r
![Page 112: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/112.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
96
(5-35)
where and are the Taylor series coefficients of and , respectively, and is
defined as follows:
(5-36)
The notation with Kronecker products is more elegant than the one we proposed in (5-20),
but it has the disadvantage that redundant monomials are present in the vector .
However, for the ideas developed here the Kronecker notation is well suited.
Next, difference equations are developed for . For instance, for we
have
(5-37)
Still following the calculations in [59] and using implicit summation, this results in a difference
equation of the form
. (5-38)
We apply the same procedure for , and so on. Furthermore, a new state vector is
defined:
x t 1+( ) Fijxi( )
t( )ujt( )
j 0=
r
∑i 0=
r
∑= with F00 0=
y t( ) Gijxi( )
t( )ujt( )
j 0=
r
∑i 0=
r
∑= with G00 0=⎩⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎧
Fij Gij f g x i( ) t( )
x 2( ) t( ) x t( ) x t( )⊗=
…
x r( ) t( ) x t( ) … x t( )⊗ ⊗=
x i( ) t( )
x i( ) t 1+( ) x 2( ) t 1+( )
x 2( ) t 1+( ) x t 1+( ) x t 1+( )⊗=
Fijxi( ) t( )uj t( )
j 0=
r
∑i 0=
r
∑⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞ Fijx
i( ) t( )uj t( )j 0=
r
∑i 0=
r
∑⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞⊗=
x 2( ) t 1+( ) Fkm Fqn⊗k q+ i=
m n+ j=
∑ x i( ) t( )uj t( )i j 0≥,∑=
x 3( ) t 1+( )
![Page 113: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/113.jpg)
Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Models
97
. (5-39)
Note that this state vector is non minimal for , because it contains identical elements
due to the redundant monomials of the Kronecker representation. Finally, the terms in (5-38)
with a nonlinear degree greater than (i.e., the terms for which ) are neglected. This
implies that the approximation of the system is actually of degree . The following state affine
model is then obtained:
(5-40)
B. Comparison of the Number of Parameters
In (5-39), we observe that the number of states in the state affine approximation grows
combinatorially with the degree of approximation . This is the price to be paid for the state
affine representation. To calculate the number of required states, the redundant states that
originate from the use of the Kronecker product, need to be taken into account. The total
number of distinct states of model (5-40) is:
(5-41)
For a SISO state affine model, there are matrix coefficients per set of state
affine matrices , and in total there are such sets. We also have to take into
account the similarity transform. Hence, the actual number of parameters is given by
. (5-42)
We will now compare this to the number of parameters that are required for a PNLSS
approximation of degree . In Figure 5-1, the ratio between expressions (5-42) (state affine
x t( )x
1( )t( )
…
xr( )
t( )
=
na 1>
r i j+ r>
r
x t 1+( ) Aiui
t( )x t( )i 0=
r 1–
∑ Biui
t( )i 1=
r
∑+=
y t( ) Ciui
t( )xt( )
i 0=
r 1–
∑ Diui
t( )i 1=
r
∑+=⎩⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎧
r
n
n
na r+
r⎝ ⎠⎜ ⎟⎛ ⎞
1–=
n2 2n 1+ +
AiBiCiDi r
r n2 2n 1+ +( ) n
2–
r
![Page 114: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/114.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
98
approach) and (5-33) (PNLSS approach) is shown for various system orders ( ),
and for different degrees of approximation ( ). For (red line), the ratio is
one. This is a natural result since it corresponds to a linear model which has the same order
for both approximations. For , it can be seen from Figure 5-1 that the ratio is always
higher than one.
C. Conclusion
We have shown that, for an approximation of the same quality, the PNLSS model always
requires a lower number of parameters than the state affine model. For this reason, we prefer
to use the PNLSS model structure over the state affine one.
5.3.4 Stability
The only recursive relation which is present in the general state space model (5-19) is the
state equation. Hence, the stability of the model only depends on the function , the initial
conditions of the state, and the properties of the input signal. Therefore, when analysing the
stability of (5-19), it suffices to study the following equation
, (5-43)
with . The concept of Input-to-State Stability (ISS) reflects this idea. It was
introduced in [74] for continuous-time systems, and extended to the discrete-time case in
na 1 … 10, ,=
r 1 … 5, ,= r 1=
r 1>
2 4 6 8 10
100
101
102
103
Order na of the approximated system
Ratio n
um
. par.
SA/P
NLSS
r=1
r=2
r=3
r=4
r=5
Figure 5-1. Ratio of the number of parameters for the SA approximation and the PNLSS approximation, for different degrees .r
f
x t 1+( ) f x t( ) u t( ),( )=
x 0( ) x0=
![Page 115: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/115.jpg)
Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Models
99
[32]. In order to define ISS, the following notations and definitions are used: denotes the
set of all non negative integers. The set of all input functions with the norm
is denoted by , and is the Euclidean norm. The initial
state is given by .
Definition 5.2 A function is a -function if it is continuous, strictly
increasing and if . A function is a -function if for
each fixed , the function is a -function, and if for each fixed , the
function is decreasing, and if as .
Definition 5.3 (Input-to-State-Stability) System (5-43) is globally ISS, if there
exist a -function and a -function , such that for each input and each
it holds that
(5-44)
for each .
Loosely explained, a system is ISS if every state trajectory corresponding to a bounded input
remains bounded, and if the trajectory eventually becomes small when the input signal
becomes small as well, independent of the initial state. In this thesis, we will not try to find
such functions and .
5.3.5 Some Remarks on the Polynomial Approach
A. Orthogonal Polynomials
The question addressed here is whether the use of orthogonal polynomials can create some
additional value to the identification of the PNLSS model. Orthogonal polynomials have proved
their usefulness in times when computing power and memory were scarce. For linear
problems, the orthogonality of regressors induces two advantages. First of all, the re-
estimation of parameters is circumvented when new regressors are added to an already
solved problem. Unfortunately, this asset is of no use here, since the identification of the
proposed model (5-20) requires solving a nonlinear problem (see “Identification of the PNLSS
Model” on p. 115). Secondly, orthogonality can improve the numerical conditioning. To this
�
u: � �m→
u sup u t( ) : t �∈{ } ∞<= l∞m .
x 0( ) x0=
γ: ��0 ��0→ �
γ 0( ) 0= β: ��0 �× ��0→ ��
t 0≥ β . t,( ) � s 0≥
β s .,( ) β s t,( ) 0→ t ∞→
�� β � γ u l∞m∈
x0 �na∈
x t x0 u, ,( ) β x0 t,( ) γ u( )+≤
t �∈
β γ
![Page 116: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/116.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
100
matter, it should be noted that orthogonal basis functions only offer a clear advantage when
they are applied to signals with a given probability density function. For instance, Hermite
polynomials and Chebyshev polynomials are well suited for Gaussian and uniformly distributed
signals, respectively. Bearing in mind the class of excitation signals we chose in Chapter 2, it
would be logical to select Hermite polynomials. However, the states, which are polynomial
functions of the input and the previous states, do not necessarily have a Gaussian distribution.
Therefore, we will employ ordinary polynomials, since no clear advantage can be taken from
the application of orthogonal polynomials.
B. Disadvantages of the Polynomial Approach
A number of drawbacks come along with the application of polynomials. The most important
one is the explosive behaviour of polynomials outside the region in which they were
estimated. Indeed, a polynomial quickly attains large numerical values when its arguments
are large. At first sight, this might seem a serious drawback compared to the well-behaved
extrapolation of basis functions, which tend to a constant value for large input values.
However, it should be noted that, in general, it is never a good idea to extrapolate with an
estimated model. This fact is independent of the chosen basis functions, whether they are
polynomials, hyperbolic tangents, radial basis functions, or sigmoids. The only exception to
this rule is when there exists an exact match between the DUT’s internal structure and the
model structure. In a black box framework, this is seldom the case. We illustrate this rule of
thumb by means of a short simulation, where we use two kinds of basis functions to
approximate the relation
. (5-45)
To generate the estimation data set, an input signal of 2000 samples, uniformly distributed
between and is used. First, we estimate a 15th degree polynomial using
linear least squares. Then, a Gaussian Radial Basis Function (RBF) network with 8 centres is
estimated with the RBF Matlab toolbox [51]. Both models require the estimation of 16
parameters. Next, we evaluate the extrapolation behaviour of both models by applying an
input between and . The result of this test is shown in Figure 5-2. The top
plot shows the original function (solid black line), together with the polynomial approximation
(dashed grey line) and the RBF approximation (solid grey line). The bottom plot shows the
error of both approximations on a logarithmic scale. Although the output of the RBF model
y atan u( )=
u 5–= u 5=
u 10–= u 10=
![Page 117: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/117.jpg)
Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Models
101
does not explode like with the polynomial approach (as a matter of fact, it converges to zero
for ), it still exhibits severe extrapolation errors close to the estimation region. We
conclude that the use of ‘well-behaved’ basis functions like RBFs, hyperbolic tangents, or
sigmoids is no justification to employ them for extrapolation.
x ∞±→
10 5 0 5 10
2
0
2
y
10 5 0 5 10
50
0
50
100
Err
or
[dB]
u
Figure 5-2. Top: arctangent function (solid black line);polynomial approximation (dash dotted grey line);
Gaussian RBF approximation (solid grey line).Bottom: Model error for both approximations.
![Page 118: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/118.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
102
5.4 On the Equivalence with some Block-oriented Models
The past years, simple block-oriented models have been utilized extensively to model
nonlinear systems. The block-oriented models most commonly used are the Hammerstein,
Wiener, Wiener-Hammerstein, and the Nonlinear Feedback model. Numerous applications of
these models in various fields can be found in literature: the modelling of heat exchangers
[10], transmission lines [58], chemical processes [49], and biological systems [30].
Furthermore, various identification methods for block-oriented models exist [2],[3],[11]. In
the following sections, we will establish a link between the Polynomial NonLinear State Space
(PNLSS) model and a number of standard block-oriented models. We will restrict ourselves to
SISO systems, because there exists no rigorous definition for MIMO block-oriented models:
when the number of system inputs is different from the number of outputs, it is not clear
which dimensions the intermediate signals (i.e., the signals between the blocks) should have.
Furthermore, a distinction will be made between the Hammerstein, Wiener, and Wiener-
Hammerstein system. The first two systems can be considered as a special case of the
Wiener-Hammerstein system, but making a distinction will render the analysis more simple
and interpretable.
5.4.1 Hammerstein
A Hammerstein system consists of a static nonlinearity followed by a linear dynamic system
(see Figure 5-3). A typical example where this model is utilized is in the case of a non-ideal
sensor exhibiting a static nonlinear effect, which is followed by a transmission line showing a
linear dynamic behaviour.
In general, the input signal is distorted by a static nonlinearity , resulting in the
intermediate signal which is filtered by a linear system . The linear system is
uv
y
G0 z( )P
Figure 5-3. Hammerstein system.
u P
v G0 z( )
![Page 119: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/119.jpg)
On the Equivalence with some Block-oriented Models
103
parametrized as a -th order linear state space model with parameters { }. For
the parametrization of the static nonlinearity, we rely on the Weierstrass theorem.
Theorem 5.4 (Weierstrass Approximation Theorem) Let be a continuous
function on a closed interval . Then, given any , there exists a polynomial
of degree such that
(5-46)
for all in .
In other words, a continuous function on a closed interval can be uniformly approximated by
polynomials [35]. Hence, the static nonlinearity in Figure 5-3 is parametrized as a polynomial
with coefficients .
The following equations describe the Hammerstein system:
(5-47)
(5-48)
The substitution of (5-47) in (5-48) results in a set of equations identical to (5-20), when we
define the system matrices in (5-20) as
(5-49)
and the vectors of monomials as
. (5-50)
na A0B0C0D0
f
a b[ , ] ε 0> P
r
f x( ) P x( )– ε<
x a b[ , ]
pi
v t( ) piui
t( )i 1=
r
∑=
x0 t 1+( ) A0x0 t( ) B0v t( )+=
y t( ) C0x0 t( ) D0v t( )+=⎩⎨⎧
A A0= B p1B0
= C C0= D p1D0=
E p2B0 … prB
0= F p2D
0 … prD
0=
ζ t( ) η t( ) u t( ) r{ }= =
![Page 120: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/120.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
104
For the Hammerstein system, and are a subset of the polynomial vector functions
defined in (5-32). Therefore, we can conclude that a Hammerstein system with a continuous
nonlinearity can be represented by the PNLSS model in (5-20).
5.4.2 Wiener
A Wiener system is composed of a linear dynamic block followed by a static nonlinear
block, as shown in Figure 5-4.
The equations that describe the behaviour of a Wiener system are
(5-51)
(5-52)
By substituting the second equation of (5-51) in (5-52), and by applying the Multinomial
Expansion (see “Multinomial Expansion Theorem” on p. 92), we find the following set of
system matrices:
(5-53)
and
. (5-54)
ζ t( ) η t( )
G0 z( )
uv
y
G0 z( ) P
Figure 5-4. Wiener system.
x0 t 1+( ) A0x0 t( ) B0u t( )+=
v t( ) C0x0 t( ) D0u t( )+=⎩⎨⎧
y t( ) pivi
t( )i 1=
r
∑=
A A0= B B0= C p1C0
= D p1D0= E 0=
F p2C02
1( ) 2p2C0
1( )C0 2( ) … rprC0
na( )D0r 1–
prD0r=
ζ t( ) 0= η t( ) ξ t( ) r{ }=
![Page 121: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/121.jpg)
On the Equivalence with some Block-oriented Models
105
A similar conclusion as for the Hammerstein systems can be drawn: and in (5-54)
are a subset of the polynomial vector functions defined in (5-32). Hence, Wiener systems with
a continuous static nonlinearity can be represented using the PNLSS approach.
5.4.3 Wiener-Hammerstein
Wiener-Hammerstein systems are defined as a static nonlinear block sandwiched between
two linear dynamic blocks and with orders and , respectively (see
Figure 5-5). The intermediate signals are denoted as and .
The system equations are:
(5-55)
(5-56)
(5-57)
These equations are combined in order to obtain the representation of (5-20). For this, the
state vectors and are merged into the new state vector . Again, the
equivalence holds, and we obtain the system matrices in (5-58).
ζ t( ) η t( )
G1 z( ) G2 z( ) n1 n2
v t( ) w t( )
uv
y
G1 z( ) P
w
G2 z( )
Figure 5-5. Wiener-Hammerstein system.
x1 t 1+( ) A1x1 t( ) B1u t( )+=
v t( ) C1x1 t( ) D1u t( )+=⎩⎨⎧
w t( ) pivi
t( )i 1=
r
∑=
x2 t 1+( ) A2x2 t( ) B2w t( )+=
y t( ) C2x2 t( ) D2w t( )+=⎩⎨⎧
x1 t( ) x2 t( ) x t( )
![Page 122: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/122.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
106
(5-58)
The vectors of monomials are defined as
, (5-59)
where
. (5-60)
5.4.4 Nonlinear Feedback
In this section, we will discuss a simple (I) and a more general (II) type of Nonlinear
Feedback system. The first system is shown in Figure 5-6, and is referred to as NLFB I.
It is described by the following equations:
(5-61)
A A1 0n1 n2×
p1B2C1 A2
= BB1
p1D1B2
= C p1D2C1 C2= D p1D
1D2=
E0
n1 1×0
n1 1×… 0
n1 1×0
n1 1×
p2B2C12
1( ) 2p2B2C1
1( )C1 2( ) … rprB2C1
n1( )D1r 1–
prB2D1r
=
F D2 p2C12
1( ) 2p2C1
1( )C1 2( ) … rprC1
n1( )D1r 1–
prD1r=
ζ t( ) η t( ) ξ' t( ) r{ }= =
ξ' t( ) x1 t( ) … xn1t( ) u t( )
T=
uv
y
G0 z( )
PFigure 5-6. Nonlinear Feedback I.
++
-
x0 t 1+( ) A0x0 t( ) B0v t( )+=
y t( ) C0x0 t( ) D0v t( )+=⎩⎨⎧
![Page 123: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/123.jpg)
On the Equivalence with some Block-oriented Models
107
(5-62)
After substitution of (5-62) in (5-61), we obtain:
(5-63)
The last equation of (5-63) is a nonlinear algebraic equation due to the presence of the direct
term coefficient . This coefficient renders the system incompatible with the PNLSS model.
For the more general Nonlinear Feedback system (see Figure 5-7), similar nonlinear algebraic
equations pop up due to the direct term of the linear subsystems.
In order to continue the analysis, the following assumptions are made:
Assumption 5.5 (Delay in system NLFB I) A delay is present in the linear dynamic
block , i.e., .
Assumption 5.6 (Delay in system NLFB II) A delay is present in at least one of the
linear blocks , , or . This is equivalent to , , or
.
Assumption 5.5 and Assumption 5.6 are true, when for instance a digital controller is present
somewhere in the feedback loop. If this is not the case, we will still assume that a zero direct
v t( ) u t( ) piyi
t( )i 1=
r
∑–=
x0 t 1+( ) A0x0 t( ) B0 u t( ) piyi
t( )i 1=
r
∑–⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞+=
y t( ) C0x0 t( ) D0 u t( ) piyi
t( )i 1=
r
∑–⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞+=
⎩⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎧
D0
u y
G1 z( )
P
+
G2 z( )G3 z( )Figure 5-7. Nonlinear Feedback II.
+
-
G0 z( ) D0 0=
G1 z( ) G2 z( ) G3 z( ) D1 0= D2 0=
D3 0=
![Page 124: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/124.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
108
term is present in one of the linear blocks. Note that a delay is always present in real-life
systems. If the sampling frequency is sufficiently high, the delay will be in the same order of
magnitude as one delay tab. When this condition is not fulfilled, the data can be upsampled in
order to achieve a negligible direct term [12]. The equations in (5-63) are therefore reduced
to:
(5-64)
These system equations are equivalent to (5-20) using the following system parameters:
(5-65)
and the following vectors of monomials:
. (5-66)
To prove the equivalence for the system NLFB II, different polynomial vector maps are
necessary. They depend on the position of the delay in the feedback loop (i.e., the linear
system for which is assumed to be zero). In (5-67), we define three vectors composed of
the state vectors of the linear systems , , and .
(5-67)
The necessary monomials and are listed in Table 5-2.
0 0
Table 5-2. Required monomials as a function of the position of the delay.
x0 t 1+( ) A0x0 t( ) B0 u t( ) pi C0x0 t( )( )ii 1=
r
∑–⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞+=
y t( ) C0x0 t( )=⎩⎪⎨⎪⎧
A A0 p1B0C0–= B B0= C C0= D 0= F 0=
E B– 0 p2C02
1( ) 2p2C0
1( )C0 2( ) … rprC0
na 1–( )C0r 1–
na( ) prC0r
na( )=
ζ t( ) x t( ) r{ }= η t( ) 0=
Di
G1 z( ) G2 z( ) G3 z( )
ξ1 t( ) x1 t( ) x2 t( )T
= ξ2 t( ) x2 t( )= ξ3 t( ) x1 t( ) x2 t( ) x3 t( ) u t( )T
=
ζ t( ) η t( )
D1 0= D2 0= D3 0=
ζ t( ) ξ1 t( )r{ } ξ2 t( )
r{ } ξ3 t( )r{ }
η t( ) ξ2 t( )r{ }
![Page 125: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/125.jpg)
On the Equivalence with some Block-oriented Models
109
5.4.5 Conclusion
We have established a link between a number of standard block-oriented models and the
PNLSS model. The results for the different nonlinear block structures are summarized in Table
5-3 and Table 5-4. In each row, the required monomials for the PNLSS approach are
presented.
It is beyond discussion that block-oriented models give the most physical insight to the user.
From an identification point of view, they often require less parameters than the PNLSS
approach. The open loop block-oriented models have the advantage that the intermediary
signals are solved in a non recurrent way during the estimation and the simulation. Therefore,
their stability is simple to check and to ensure. On the other hand, block-oriented models
require prior knowledge about the structure of the device, which is not always easy to obtain.
For some block-oriented models, like the Wiener-Hammerstein system or the Nonlinear
Feedback Structure, initial values are not always straightforward to obtain.
The PNLSS model is inherently compatible with MIMO systems, and it does not need any prior
knowledge. The price paid for this flexibility is the explosion of the number of required model
parameters. The pros and cons of both approaches are summarized in Table 5-5. To conclude,
Hammerstein(5-49)
Wiener(5-53)
Wiener-Hammerstein(5-58)
0
Table 5-3. PNLSS monomials for open loop block-oriented models.
NLFB I(5-65)
NLFB II, (5-67)
NLFB II, (5-67)
NLFB II, (5-67)
0 0
Table 5-4. PNLSS monomials for feedback block-oriented models.
ζ t( ) u t( ) r{ } ξ' t( ) r{ }
η t( ) u t( ) r{ } ξ t( ) r{ } ξ' t( ) r{ }
D1 0= D2 0= D3 0=
ζ t( ) x t( ) r{ } ξ1 t( )r{ } ξ2 t( )
r{ } ξ3 t( )r{ }
η t( ) x t( ) r{ } ξ2 t( )r{ }
![Page 126: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/126.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
110
none of both the approaches is clearly better than the other. For this reason, the user should
choose an appropriate model structure according to his/her needs.
Block-Oriented State SpacePhysical interpretation �
Number of parameters �
Flexibility of the model �
Model initialization �
Table 5-5. Comparison of the block-oriented approach vs. the state space approach.
![Page 127: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/127.jpg)
A Step beyond the Volterra Framework
111
5.5 A Step beyond the Volterra FrameworkBy means of two simple examples, we illustrate that systems which fit into the polynomial
nonlinear state space model structure, do not necessarily belong to the Volterra framework
which was set up in the introductory chapter.
5.5.1 Duffing Oscillator
The Duffing oscillator is a second order nonlinear dynamic system which is excited with a
harmonic signal. Its behaviour is described by the following differential equation:
, (5-68)
where , , and are the system parameters. The amplitude of the sinusoidal signal is
determined by the parameter . According to the value of this parameter, several kinds of
output behaviour can occur, such as ordinary harmonic output, period doubling, period
quadrupling, and even chaotic behaviour. The Duffing equation can also be written in a state
space form:
(5-69)
where . Next, this continuous-time model is converted into a discrete-time
model using the Euler rule with a time step :
(5-70)
such that
, (5-71)
and
d2yc
dt2----------- a
dyc
dt-------- byc cyc
3+ + + dcos ωt( )=
a b c
d
dX1 t( )dt
---------------- X2 t( )=
dX2 t( )dt
---------------- duc t( ) aX2 t( )– bX1 t( )– cX13 t( )–=
⎩⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎧
uc t( ) cos ωt( )=
h
dX t( )dt
------------- f X t( ) uc t( ),( ) = x t 1+( )⇒ x t( ) hf x t( ) u t( ),( )+=
X th( ) x t( )≅
![Page 128: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/128.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
112
. (5-72)
We apply this principle to (5-69), and obtain
(5-73)
The discrete-time model in (5-73) might be a poor approximation of its continuous-time
counterpart due the simplicity of the differentiation rule. However, in what follows the focus
will lie solely on the behaviour of the discrete-time model, and not on the relation between (5-
69) and (5-73). From (5-73), it is clear that this system belongs to the PNLSS model class. In
the next simulation, these equations are simulated during iterations using the
following settings:
(5-74)
u t( ) uc th( )=
x1 t 1+( ) x1 t( ) hx2 t( )+=
x2 t 1+( ) hdu t( ) 1 ha–( )x2 t( ) hbx1 t( )– hcx13 t( )–+=⎩
⎨⎧
Nsim 106
=
0 20 40 60 80
0.5
0
0.5
x2(t
)
Time [s]
0 5 10 15 20 25 30300
200
100
0
100
Spect
rum
x2 [
dB]
Angular Frequency [rad/s]
Figure 5-8. Top plot: state trajectory of the discretized Duffing oscillator;bottom plot: DFT of the state trajectory (grey) and the input signal (black).
a 1= b 10–= c 100= d 0.82= ω 3.5= h2πωN--------=
![Page 129: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/129.jpg)
A Step beyond the Volterra Framework
113
with . The value of the time step is chosen such that no leakage is present in the
calculated DFTs. In Figure 5-8, the state trajectory of during the first 100 seconds is
shown (top plot). In the bottom plot, the DFT of the last samples of the state trajectory is
plotted (grey), together with the DFT of the input signal (black). From this figure, we observe
that besides harmonic components, also subharmonic components are present: the harmonic
lines corresponding to , , and are also excited. Although the DUT can be
represented by the PNLSS model, it does not fit into the Volterra-framework.
5.5.2 Lorenz Attractor
In [40], E. N. Lorenz studied the nonlinear differential equations that describe the behaviour
of a forced, dissipative hydrodynamic flow. The solutions of these equations appeared to be
extremely sensitive to minor changes of the initial conditions. This is the so-called butterfly
effect. Often, the behaviour of this system is referred to as chaotic, while it is described by the
following deterministic model equations:
(5-75)
where the model parameters are given by , , and . Like in the
previous section, we convert these equations into a discrete-time description by applying the
Euler differentiation method with time step :
(5-76)
with . An input term is added to the first state equation, such that initial
conditions can be imposed on the system. It can easily be seen that these equations fit into
the proposed PNLSS model structure. As with the Duffing oscillator, we are not interested in a
N 4096= h
x2 t( )
8N
ω 4⁄ ω 2⁄ 3ω 4⁄
dX1 t( )dt
---------------- σ X2 t( ) X1 t( )–( )
=
dX2 t( )dt
---------------- X1 t( ) ρ X3 t( )–( ) X2 t( )–=
dX3 t( )dt
---------------- X1 t( )X2 t( ) bX3 t( )–=⎩⎪⎪⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎪⎪⎧
ρ 28= σ 10= b 8 3⁄=
h
x1 t 1+( ) hσ x2 t( ) x1 t( )–( ) x1 t( ) hu t( )+ +=
x2 t 1+( ) h x1 t( ) ρ x3 t( )–( ) x2 t( )–( ) x2 t( )+=
x3 t 1+( ) h x1 t( )x2 bx3 t( )–( ) x3 t( )+=⎩⎪⎨⎪⎧
Xi th( ) xi t( )≅ hu t( )
![Page 130: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/130.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
114
perfect match between (5-75) and (5-76). In the following simulation, we use a time step
, apply an impulse with amplitude on the state , and simulate the
equations in (5-76) during samples. The resulting state trajectory is shown in
Figures 5-9 and 5-10. The chaotic behaviour of this model is in contradiction to the Volterra
framework, since here the response to a periodic input is definitely not periodic. This example
illustrates that the PNLSS model structure is ‘richer’ than the Volterra framework.
h 0.01= A 0.01= x1 t( )
Nsim 10 000=
0 20 40 60 80 100
20
0
20x1(t
)
0 20 40 60 80 100
20
0
20
x2(t
)
0 20 40 60 80 1000
50
x3(t
)
Time [s]
Figure 5-9. State trajectory of the discretized Lorenz attractor (2D plot).
Figure 5-10. State trajectory of the discretized Lorenz attractor (3D plot).
![Page 131: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/131.jpg)
Identification of the PNLSS Model
115
5.6 Identification of the PNLSS ModelIn this part of the chapter, an identification procedure for the model in (5-20) is proposed. It
consists of four major steps. First, we estimate, in mean square sense, the Best Linear
Approximation (BLA) of the plant. Then, a parametric linear model is estimated from the BLA
using frequency domain subspace techniques. This is immediately followed by a nonlinear
optimization to improve the linear model estimates. The last step consists of a nonlinear
optimization procedure in order to obtain the parameters of the full nonlinear model.
5.6.1 Best Linear Approximation
For calculating the Best Linear Approximation of the Device Under Test (DUT), we refer to
Chapter 2 (see “Estimating the Best Linear Approximation” on p. 28). The procedure
explained there converts the measured input/output data into a nonparametric linear model
, and its sample covariance denoted by . is given in the form of a
Frequency Response Function (FRF). This data reduction step offers a number of advantages.
First of all, the Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) is enhanced. Secondly, it allows the user to select,
in a straightforward way, a frequency band of interest. Finally, when periodic data are
available, the measurement noise and the effect of the nonlinear behaviour can be separated.
5.6.2 Frequency Domain Subspace Identification
The next step is to transform the nonparametric estimate into a parametric model. The
purpose is to estimate a linear, discrete-time state space model from , taking into
account the covariance matrix . For this, we make use of the frequency domain
subspace algorithm in [44] which allows to incorporate covariance information for non
uniformly spaced frequency domain data. Furthermore, we rely on the results presented in
[53], where the stochastic properties of this algorithm were analysed for the case in which the
sample covariance matrix is employed instead of the true covariance matrix. In this section,
we briefly recapitulate the algorithm and the model equations on which the algorithm is
based.
A. Model Equations
First, consider the DFT in samples of the state space equations (5-9):
G k( ) CG k( ) G k( )
G k( )
G k( )
CG k( )
N
![Page 132: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/132.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
116
(5-77)
for , and with . In the transient term , is defined as
. (5-78)
In what follows, we will neglect the transient term. The procedures that determine the BLA
result in an estimate in the form of a FRF. Hence, we rewrite (5-77) into the FRF form as well.
This is done by setting . The plant model then looks as follows:
(5-79)
with the state matrix , , and the order of the model.
We multiply the second equation of (5-79) by , and elaborate it by repeatedly substituting
with the first equation of (5-79).
(5-80)
After substitutions, we obtain
. (5-81)
We write down equation (5-81) for with :
zkX k( ) AX k( ) BU k( ) zkxI+ +=
Y k( ) CX k( ) DU k( )+=⎩⎨⎧
k 1 … F, ,= zk ejωkTs= zkxI xI
xI1
N-------- x 0( ) x N( )–( )=
U k( ) Inu=
zkX k( ) AX k( ) B+=
G k( ) CX k( ) D+=⎩⎨⎧
X k( ) �na nu×
∈ G k( ) �ny nu×
∈ na
zkp
zkX k( )
zkpG k( ) zk
p 1–CzkX k( ) zkD+( )=
zkp 1–
CAX k( ) CB+ zkD+( )=
zkp 2–
CA2X k( ) CAB zkCB+ + zk
2D+( )=
…
p 1–
zkpG k( ) CA
pX k( ) CA
p 1–B zkCA
p 2–B … zk
p 1–CB zk
pD+ + + +( )+=
p 0 … r 1–, ,= r na>
![Page 133: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/133.jpg)
Identification of the PNLSS Model
117
(5-82)
The extended observability matrix and the matrix that contains the Markov
parameters, are defined as:
(5-83)
We also define
. (5-84)
By applying the definitions (5-83) and (5-84) to the equations of (5-82), we obtain the
following relation:
, (5-85)
where the matrices , , and are defined as
(5-86)
The complex data equation in (5-85) is now converted into a real equation:
, (5-87)
where we define .
G k( ) CX k( ) D+=
zkG k( ) CAX k( ) CB zkD+ +=
…
zkr 1–
G k( ) CAr 1–
X k( ) CAr 2–
B … zkr 2–
CB zkr 1–
D+ + + +=
Or Sr
Or
C
CA
…
CAr 1–
= Sr
D 0 … 0 0
CB D … 0 0
… … … … …
CAr 2–
B CAr 3–
B … CB D
=
Wr k( ) 1 zk … zkr 1–
T=
r
G OrX SrI+=
G X I
G Wr 1( ) G 1( )⊗ … Wr F( ) G F( )⊗=
X X 1( ) … X F( )=
I Wr 1( ) Inu⊗ … Wr F( ) Inu
⊗=
Gre
OrXre
SrI+=
Zre
Re Z( ) Im Z( )=
![Page 134: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/134.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
118
Assumption 5.7 We assume the following additive noise setting:
, (5-88)
where the noise matrix has independent (over ), circular complex normally
distributed elements with zero mean
, (5-89)
and covariance :
. (5-90)
Equation (5-87) then becomes
, (5-91)
with
. (5-92)
Another assumption concerns the controllability and the observability of the true plant model:
Assumption 5.8 The true plant model can be written in the form (5-79) where
is observable and is controllable.
At first sight, it is awkward to refer to a ‘true’ linear model, whereas the algorithm will be used
to identify a model for a nonlinear DUT. The actual system will definitely not adhere to the
linear representation in (5-79). However, one should bear in mind that, at this stage, the goal
is to retrieve a parametric model for the Best Linear Approximation of the system. From the
view point of the BLA, the nonlinear behaviour of the DUT only results in two kind of effects:
bias contributions which change the dynamic behaviour of the BLA, and stochastic
contributions which act like ordinary disturbing noise (see also Chapter 2).
The state space matrices can be retrieved from equation (5-91) using the frequency domain
subspace identification algorithm summarized in paragraph B.
G k( ) G0 k( ) NG k( )+=
NG k( ) k
NG k( ){ }� 0=
CG k( )
CG k( ) vec NG k( )( )vecH NG k( )( ){ }�=
Gre
OrXre
SrI NGre
+ +=
NG Wr 1( ) NG 1( )⊗ … Wr F( ) NG F( )⊗=
A C,( )
A B,( )
![Page 135: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/135.jpg)
Identification of the PNLSS Model
119
B. Frequency Domain Subspace Identification Algorithm [44]
1. Estimate the extended observability matrix , given and .
1a. Initialization: Choose and form
and , (5-93)
where denotes the -th diagonal partition of (see Appendix 5.B).
1b. Eliminate the input from using a QR-decomposition of : .
(5-94)
Define as the left upper block of elements. Then, has
dimensions , and ( ) remains after the elimination of
from .
1c. Remove the noise influence from (5-91): calculate the SVD of :
, (5-95)
and estimate as
. (5-96)
2. Make use of the shift property of to estimate and from :
and (5-97)
3. Estimate and , given and : minimize with respect to and :
, (5-98)
with
, (5-99)
. (5-100)
Or G k( ) CG k( )
r na>
Z Ire
Gre= CN Re Wr k( )Wr
H k( ) CGi
k( )i 1=
nu
∑⊗k 1=
F
∑⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞=
CGi
k( ) i CG k( )
Ire
Z ZT Z RTQT=
Z Ire
Gre
R11T 0
R12T R22
T
Q1T
Q2T
= =
R11T rnu rnu× R12
T
rny rnu× R22T rny rny× I
re
Z
CN1 2⁄–
R22T
CN1 2⁄–
R22T UΣVT=
Or
Or CN1 2⁄
U : 1:na[ , ]=
Or A C Or
A Or†
1: r 1–( )ny :[ , ]Or ny 1:rny+ :[ , ]= C Or 1:ny :[ , ]=
B D A C VSS B D
VSS εH k( )CG1–
k( )ε k( )k 1=
F
∑=
ε k( ) vec GSS A B C D k, , , ,( ) G k( )–( )=
GSS A B C D k, , , ,( ) C zkInaA–( ) 1–
B D+=
![Page 136: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/136.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
120
5.6.3 Nonlinear Optimization of the Linear Model
The weighted least squares cost function defined in (5-98) is a measure of the model
quality. According to this measure, it turns out that the subspace algorithm generates
acceptable model estimates. However, in practical applications strongly depends on the
dimension parameter chosen in step 1.a of the identification procedure. A first action that
can be taken to improve the model estimates, is to apply the subspace algorithm for different
values of , for instance , and to select the model that corresponds to the
lowest .
The second way to obtain better modelling results is to consider the cost function
, (5-101)
with
, (5-102)
and to minimize with respect to all the parameters ( ). This is a nonlinear
problem that can be solved using the Levenberg-Marquardt algorithm (see “The Levenberg-
Marquardt Algorithm” on p. 135). This method requires the computation of the Jacobian of
the model error with respect to the model parameters. From (5-102) and (5-100), we
calculate the following expressions:
(5-103)
VSS
VSS
r
r r na 1 … 6na, ,+=
VSS
VWLS εH k( )CG1–
k( )ε k( )k 1=
F
∑=
ε k( ) vec GSS A B C D k, , , ,( ) G k( )–( )=
VWLS ABCD
ε k( )
ε k( )∂Aij∂
------------- vec C zkInaA–( ) 1–
Iij
na na×zkIna
A–( ) 1–B⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞=
ε k( )∂Bij∂
------------- vec C zkInaA–( ) 1– Iij
na nu×⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞=
ε k( )∂Cij∂
------------- vec Iij
ny na×zkIna
A–( ) 1–⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞=
ε k( )∂Dij∂
------------- vec Iij
ny nu×⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞=
⎩⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎧
![Page 137: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/137.jpg)
Identification of the PNLSS Model
121
The subspace method is used to generate a number of initial linear models (e.g.
), which are used as starting values for the nonlinear optimization
procedure. Finally, the model that corresponds to the lowest cost function is selected.
Due to the fact that a high number of different initial models is employed, there is a higher
probability to end up in a global minimum of , or at least in a good local minimum. Note
that in the parameter space, there exists an infinite number of global minimizers for ,
more precisely a subspace of dimension . This is a consequence of fully parametrizing the
linear state space representation. Furthermore, while carrying out the nonlinear optimization,
the unstable models estimated with the subspace algorithm are stabilized, for instance using
the methods described in [14].
To exemplify this method, we apply it to the semi-active damper data set (see “Description of
the Experiments” on p. 161), and estimate models of order for different values of :
. In Figure 5-11, the cost function of the subspace estimates is shown
(grey dots), together with the cost function of the optimized models (black dots).
Figure 5-11 illustrates that is a craggy function of , and that for this particular data set,
the Levenberg-Marquardt algorithm ends up in the same local minimum: the same value of
is attained for a large number of initial models.
r na 1 … 6na, ,+=
VWLS
VWLS
VWLS
na2
na 3= r
r 3 … 75, ,= VSS
VWLS
VSS r
VWLS
10 20 30 40 50 60 7010
0
101
102
103
Cost
Funct
ion
r
Figure 5-11. WLS cost function of the subspace estimates (grey dots),and the cost function after the nonlinear optimization (black dots)
for different values of dimensioning parameter .
VSSVWLS
r
![Page 138: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/138.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
122
5.6.4 Estimation of the Full Nonlinear Model
The last step in the identification process is to estimate the full nonlinear model
(5-104)
with the initial state given by , and where is the output noise. For this, a
weighted least squares approach will be employed. In order to keep the estimates of the
model parameters unbiased, the following assumption is required.
Assumption 5.9 It is assumed that the input of the model in (5-104) is noiseless,
i.e., it is observed without any errors and independent of the output noise.
In practical situations, it may occur that Assumption 5.9 is not fulfilled. When the SNR at the
input is sufficiently high (> 40 dB), the resulting bias in the estimated model parameters is
negligible. When the SNR is too low, it can be increased by employing periodic signals: by
measuring a sufficient number of periods, and averaging over time or frequency, the SNR is
improved in a straightforward way.
The weighted least squares cost function with respect to the model parameters
will be minimized:
, (5-105)
where is a user-chosen, frequency domain weighting matrix. Typically, this
matrix is chosen equal to the inverse covariance matrix of the output . This matrix can
be obtained straightforwardly when periodic signals are used to excite the DUT. By choosing
properly, it is also possible to put more weight in a certain frequency band of interest.
When no covariance information is available and no specific weighting is required by the user,
a constant weighting ( , for ) is employed. Furthermore, the model
error is defined as
, (5-106)
x t 1+( ) Ax t( ) Bu t( ) Eζ t( )+ +=
y t( ) Cx t( ) Du t( ) Fη t( ) e t( )+ + +=⎩⎨⎧
x 1( ) x0= e t( )
u t( )
VWLS
θ vec A( ) vec B( ) vec C( ) vec D( ) vec E( ) vec F( );;;;;[ ]=
VWLS θ( ) εH k θ,( )W k( )ε k θ,( )k 1=
F
∑=
W k( ) �ny ny×
∈
CY1–
k( )
W k( )
W k( ) 1= k 1 … F, ,=
ε k θ,( ) �ny∈
ε k θ,( ) Ym k θ,( ) Y k( )–=
![Page 139: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/139.jpg)
Identification of the PNLSS Model
123
where and are the DFT of the modelled and the measured output,
respectively. Note that when is calculated with correct initial conditions, equation
(5-106) does not pose serious leakage problems in the case of non periodic data, because the
leakage terms present in and cancel each other.
A. Calculation of the Jacobian
We minimize by means of the Levenberg-Marquardt algorithm (see “The
Levenberg-Marquardt Algorithm” on p. 135). This requires the computation of the Jacobian
of the modelled output with respect to the model parameters. Hence, we need to
compute
. (5-107)
Given the nonlinear relationship in (5-104), it is impractical to calculate the model output and
the Jacobian directly in the frequency domain. Therefore, we will perform these operations in
the time domain, followed by a DFT in order to obtain and .
Before deriving explicit expressions, we recapitulate some general aspects with respect to the
calculation of the Jacobian, which are pointed out in [47] and [78].
Consider a general discrete-time nonlinear model
(5-108)
where and are the model parameters present in the state and output equation,
respectively. The derivatives of the output with respect to and are given by
(5-109)
Ym k θ,( ) Y k( )
Ym k θ,( )
Ym k θ,( ) Y k( )
VWLS θ( )
J k θ,( )
J k θ,( ) ε k θ,( )∂θ∂
-------------------Ym k θ,( )∂
θ∂------------------------= =
Ym k θ,( ) J k θ,( )
x t 1+( ) f x t( ) u t( ) a, ,( )=
y t( ) g x t( ) u t( ) b, ,( )=⎩⎨⎧
a b
y t( ) a b
x t 1+( )∂a∂
--------------------- f x t( ) u t( ) a, ,( )∂x t( )∂
-------------------------------------- x t( )∂a∂
------------ f x t( ) u t( ) a, ,( )∂a∂
--------------------------------------+=
y t( )∂a∂
------------ g x t( ) u t( ) b, ,( )∂x t( )∂
--------------------------------------- x t( )∂a∂
------------=
y t( )∂b∂
------------ g x t( ) u t( ) b, ,( )∂b∂
---------------------------------------=⎩⎪⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎪⎧
![Page 140: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/140.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
124
These equations can be rewritten as follows
(5-110)
Hence, the expressions that define the calculation of the Jacobian (5-110) can be regarded as
a new dynamic discrete-time nonlinear model. The inputs of this Jacobian model are the
inputs and the simulated states of the original model. These states are obtained by simulating
the original model with the estimated parameters of the previous Levenberg-Marquardt
iteration. For model equations (5-104), explicit expressions for the Jacobian can be found in
Appendix 5.D. Furthermore, due to the polynomial nature of (5-104), the equations in (5-110)
are in a polynomial form as well. Hence, a PNLSS model can be determined that calculates the
elements of the Jacobian. In Appendix 5.E, explicit expressions are derived for the state space
matrices of this new model.
B. Initial Conditions
In (5-110), the simulated states are employed to calculate the Jacobian. Hence, when the
state sequence is computed, the initial state of the model in (5-104) should be taken into
account. For this, three possible approaches are distinguished. The simplest, but rather
inefficient way, is to calculate the Jacobian for the full data set, and then to discard the first
transient samples of both the Jacobian and the model error. In this way, a part of the
data is not used for the model estimation.
The second method can only be employed when periodic excitations are applied during the
experiments. As mentioned earlier, the simulated states from the previous Levenberg-
Marquardt iteration are used to calculate the Jacobian. By applying several periods of the
input sequence, and by considering only the last simulated state period, the transients
become negligible. This principle is depicted in Figure 5-12 for two input periods. In this
particular example, it suffices to discard the first period to obtain states that are in regime. In
order to save computing time, a fraction of a period can be used as a preamble. This can be
done for highly damped systems, or when the number of samples per period is high.
xa t 1+( ) fx x t( ) u t( ) a, ,( )xa t( ) fa x t( ) u t( ) a, ,( )+=
ya t( ) gx x t( ) u t( ) b, ,( )xa t( )=
yb t( ) gb
x t( ) u t( ) b, ,( )=⎩⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎧
x0
Ntrans
![Page 141: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/141.jpg)
Identification of the PNLSS Model
125
The last method, which is suitable for both periodic and non periodic excitations, is to
estimate the initial conditions as if they were ordinary model parameters. This can be
achieved in a straightforward way, since the estimation of is equivalent to estimating an
extra column in the state space matrix . The idea is to add an artificial model input to
the model, which only contributes to the state equation in a linear way (i.e., only via the
matrix). The resulting input is then given by
. (5-111)
Assume that the original input, the state and the output data sequences are defined for time
indices . We consider and , and apply an impulse signal to
the artificial input of the system:
(5-112)
Then, we obtain the following state equation for :
(5-113)
Consequently, the initial conditions can be estimated like ordinary model parameters by
adding an artificial input to the model.
nonlinear
model
input states
Figure 5-12. Removal of the transients in the simulated states;state(s) in regime (black), transient (red).
x0
x0
B uart
B
u' t( ) u t( )uart t( )
=
t 1 … N, ,= u 0( ) 0= x 0( ) 0=
uart t( )1 t 0=
0 t 1 … N, ,=⎩⎨⎧
=
t 0=
x 1( ) Ax 0( ) Bu' 0( ) Eζ 0( )+ +=
Bu' 0( )=
B : nu 1+,[ ]=
uart
![Page 142: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/142.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
126
C. Starting Values
The last obstacle that needs to be cleared before starting the nonlinear optimization is to
choose good starting values for . For the matrices , , , and , we will use the
estimates obtained from the parametric Best Linear Approximation. The other state space
matrices ( and ) are initially set to zero. The idea of using a linear model as a starting
point for the nonlinear modelling is certainly not new (e.g. [71]), and is quite often employed.
Using the parametric BLA as the initial nonlinear model offers two important advantages. First
of all, it guarantees that the estimated nonlinear model performs at least as good as the best
linear model. Secondly, for the model structure in (5-104), this principle results in a rough
estimate of the model order .
D. How to handle the similarity transform?
As mentioned earlier, the state space representation is not unique: the similarity transform
leaves the input/output behaviour unaffected. The elements of the
transformation matrix can be chosen freely, under the condition that is non singular. The
parameter space has thus at least unnecessary dimensions. This poses a problem for the
gradient-based identification of the model parameters : the Jacobian does not have
full rank and, hence, an infinite number of equivalent solutions exists.
One way to deal with this problem is to use a canonical parametrization, such that the
redundancy disappears. However, it is known that this may lead to numerically ill-conditioned
estimation problems [45].
A second way to cope with the overparametrization is to employ so-called Data Driven Local
Coordinates (DDLC) [45], or a Projected Gradient search [80]. The key idea of these methods
is to identify the manifold of models parametrized by in the parameter space, for which the
models have an identical input/output behaviour. Thus, any parameter update for which the
model remains on this manifold does not change the input/output behaviour. Therefore, the
methods presented in [45] and [80] compute the parameter update such that it is locally
orthogonal to the manifold: this is achieved by computing a projection matrix
such that the new Jacobian
(5-114)
θ A B C D
E F
na
xT t( ) T 1– x t( )= na2
T T
na2
θ �nθ∈
θ
P �nθ nθ na
2–×∈
JDDLC θ( ) J θ( )P=
![Page 143: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/143.jpg)
Identification of the PNLSS Model
127
has columns less than the original Jacobian , and has full rank. The matrix needs
to be determined during every iteration step.
The third method to deal with the rank deficiency of the Jacobian consists in using a full
parametrization, and employing a truncated Singular Value Decomposition (for more details,
see “The Levenberg-Marquardt Algorithm” on p. 135). In [86], it is shown that this method
and the DDLC method are equivalent: the search direction in the -space computed with
DDLC and the one obtained by means of a truncated SVD are identical. The additional
advantage of the DDLC method is the calculation of less columns of the Jacobian matrix
compared to the full parametrization. This can save a considerable amount of computation
time, especially when the model order is high. The DDLC approach is feasible when the
computation of is straightforward. This is the case for linear, bilinear, and LPV state space
models. However, for the polynomial nonlinear state space model, the calculation of is very
involved. Hence, we will employ the third method: a full parametrization and a truncated SVD.
E. Overfitting and Validation
The nonlinear search should be pursued until the cost function in (5-105) stops decreasing.
However, as it is often the case for model structures with many parameters, overfitting can
occur during the nonlinear optimization [70]. This phenomenon can be visualized by applying
a fresh data set to the models obtained from the iterations of the nonlinear search. In the
case of overfitting, the model quality first increases up to an optimum, and then deteriorates
as a function of the number of iterations. The reason for this is the following: at the start of
the optimization, the important parameters are quickly pulled to minimizing values, and
diminish the bias error. As the minimization continues, the less important parameters are
more and more drawn to minimizing values. Hence, a growing number of parameters
becomes activated, and the variance on the parameter estimates increases. In order to avoid
this effect, we use the so-called stopped search [70]: we evaluate the model quality of every
estimated model on a test set, and then select the model that achieves the best result. This
method is a form of implicit regularization, because it prevents the activation of unnecessary
parameters.
na2 J θ( ) P
θ
na2
P
P
![Page 144: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/144.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
128
F. Stability during Estimation and Validation
We will assume that the parametric linear model obtained from the BLA is stable. As
mentioned before, this can be ensured using stabilizing methods for linear models, like for
instance [14]. Hence, the nonlinear optimization of the full PNLSS model is started from a
stable model. The first phase in the nonlinear optimization consists of calculating the
Jacobian. Hence, the first question is whether this calculation remains stable. Consider the
recursive expressions for the Jacobian given in (5-168). From these equations, it is observed
that the time-varying dynamics of the Jacobian are determined by the factor
. (5-115)
On the other hand, the Jacobian matrix of the original state equation in (5-104), with respect
to the states, is given by
. (5-116)
This expression describes the linearised dynamic behaviour of the original model at every time
instance. Since (5-115) and (5-116) are identical, the original model and the Jacobian model
share the same dynamic behaviour (i.e., the instantaneous poles of both models are
identical). Consequently, a stable model always yields a stable Jacobian.
The second question is whether a parameter update during the nonlinear optimization yields a
stable model. Naturally, this is not necessarily the case. When unstability occurs, it will be
reflected by the value of the cost function (Inf or NaN). This phenomenon can easily be
handled by the nonlinear optimization procedure, as if it was an ordinary increase of the cost
function.
On experimental data, it occurs from time to time that the estimated model becomes unstable
on the validation set. To overcome this problem, the following heuristic approach is employed.
The validation input signal is also passed on to the nonlinear optimization algorithm. In this
way, the validation output of the updated model with parameters (see Figure 5-14 in
“The Levenberg-Marquardt Algorithm” on p. 135) can be computed in every iteration. When
the validation output is unstable, the optimization algorithm reacts as if the cost function has
increased. This approach guarantees a model which is stable for the validation set.
A Eζ' t( )+( )
x t 1+( )∂x t( )∂
--------------------- A Eζ' t( )+=
θtest
![Page 145: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/145.jpg)
Identification of the PNLSS Model
129
Nevertheless, this procedure prevents the iterative search to go through an unstable
(validation) zone before ending up in a stable zone again. Consequently, this method should
only be applied when it is strictly necessary.
![Page 146: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/146.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
130
Appendix 5.A Some CombinatorialsIn this appendix, we calculate the number of distinct monomials in variables of a given
degree . Choosing different elements out of a set of elements can be done in a number
of different ways, which is given by the binomial coefficient:
(5-117)
For instance, if we have to choose two different elements from , this results in
(5-118)
combinations, namely
(5-119)
We would also like to add identical combinations, like for instance. To do so, we need
to add one dummy variable to the set . Then, the resulting 10 combinations
are:
(5-120)
In general, we need to add dummy variables in order to obtain
(5-121)
monomials of degree in variables.
n
r r n
nr⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞ n!
r! n r–( )!----------------------=
1 2 3 4, , ,{ }
42⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞ 4!
2! 4 2–( )!------------------------ 6= =
1 2,{ } 1 3,{ } 1 4,{ }, ,2 3,{ } 2 4,{ },
3 4,{ }
1 1,{ }
s 1 2 3 4, , ,{ }
1 2,{ } 1 3,{ } 1 4,{ } 1 s,{ }, , , s 1=
2 3,{ } 2 4,{ } 2 s,{ }, , s 2=
3 4,{ } 3 s,{ }, s 3=
4 s,{ } s 4=
r 1–
n r 1–+r⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞ n r 1–+( )!r! n 1–( )!
---------------------------=
r n
![Page 147: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/147.jpg)
Identification of the PNLSS Model
131
Appendix 5.B Construction of the Subspace Weighting Matrix from the FRF CovarianceThe subspace identification algorithm requires the computation of the weighting matrix ,
which is defined as
. (5-122)
In Chapter 2, we have determined the covariance matrix as:
. (5-123)
The purpose of this appendix is to find an expression for as a function of the elements of
.
When we substitute (5-92) in (5-122), we obtain:
(5-124)
The following identities hold:
(5-125)
i.e., the Hermitian transpose of a Kronecker product and the Mixed Product rule. Applying
these Kronecker product properties to (5-124) results in:
(5-126)
We denote the -th column of as and obtain
. (5-127)
On the other hand, we also have that
CN
CN Re NG k( )NGH k( ){ }�( )=
CG k( )
CG k( ) vec NG k( )( )vecH NG k( )( ){ }�=
CN
CG k( )
CN Re Wr k( ) NG k( )⊗[ ] Wr k( ) NG k( )⊗[ ]Hk 1=
F
∑⎩ ⎭⎨ ⎬⎧ ⎫
�⎝ ⎠⎜ ⎟⎛ ⎞
=
A B⊗( )H AH
BH⊗=
A B⊗( ) C D⊗( ) AC BD⊗=
CN Re Wr k( )WrH k( ) NG k( )NG
H k( ){ }�⊗k 1=
F
∑⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞=
i NG k( ) N : i,[ ] k( )
NG k( )NGH k( ) N : i,[ ] k( )N : i,[ ]
H k( )i 1=
nu
∑=
![Page 148: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/148.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
132
. (5-128)
Hence, the partition at position in with dimensions (see Figure 5-13) is
given by
. (5-129)
Taking into account equation (5-127), it is clear that can be computed from
the elements of . First, should be divided into partitions,
in which each partition contains elements. Next, the diagonal partitions should be
summed in order to determine . Finally, we obtain
, (5-130)
where denotes the -th partition on the diagonal of .
N vec NG k( )( )vecH NG k( )( )N : 1,[ ] k( )
…N : nu,[ ] k( )
N : 1,[ ]H k( ) … N : nu,[ ]
H k( )= =
Nij i j,( ) N ny ny×
Nij N : i,[ ] k( )N : j,[ ]H k( )=
Niji
j
Figure 5-13. divided into partitions.N ny ny×
NG k( )NGH k( ){ }�
CG k( ) N k( ){ }�= CG k( ) nu nu×
ny ny×
NG k( )NGH k( ){ }�
CN Re Wr k( )WrH k( ) CG
i k( )i 1=
nu
∑⊗k 1=
F
∑⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞=
CGi k( ) i ny ny× CG k( )
![Page 149: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/149.jpg)
Identification of the PNLSS Model
133
Appendix 5.C Nonlinear Optimization MethodsConsider the cost function which is a function of the parameter vector and
the measurements . In this appendix, we will summarize a number of standard iterative
nonlinear optimization methods that can be used to minimize with respect to .
Given their iterative nature, these methods all have in common the computation of a
parameter update .
A. The Gradient Descent Algorithm
The gradient descent algorithm is the most intuitive method to find the minimum of a
function. In this iterative procedure, the parameter update is proportional to the negative
gradient of the cost function
, (5-131)
with the damping factor. The main advantages of the gradient method are its conceptual
simplicity and its large region of convergence to a (local) minimum. The most important
drawback is its slow convergence.
B. The Gauss-Newton Algorithm
When a quadratic cost function needs to be minimized:
, (5-132)
with a residual, the Gauss-Newton algorithm is well suited. The reason for this
is that this iterative procedure makes explicit use of the quadratic nature of the cost function.
This results in a faster convergence compared to the gradient method [25]. The parameter
update of this method is given by
. (5-133)
This approach requires the knowledge of the Hessian matrix (i.e., the matrix containing
the second derivatives) and the gradient of the cost function, both with respect to .
V θ Z,( ) θ �nθ∈
Z
V θ Z,( ) θ
∆θ
∆θ
∇V
∆θ λ∇– V=
λ
V θ Z,( )
V θ Z,( ) eT θ Z,( )e θ Z,( ) ek θ Z,( ) 2
k 1=
N
∑= =
e θ Z,( ) �N∈
∆θ
∆θ ∇2V
⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞
1–∇V–=
∇2V
∇V θ
![Page 150: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/150.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
134
Further on, it will become clear that, for a quadratic cost function, the Hessian can be
approximated by making use of only the first order derivatives of . The Hessian matrix
and the gradient are given by
, (5-134)
, (5-135)
where is defined as the Jacobian matrix of with respect to :
. (5-136)
When the residuals are small, the second term in (5-134) is negligible compared to
the first term. Hence, the Hessian can be approximated by
, (5-137)
which is only a function of the Jacobian. Hence, the Gauss-Newton parameter update is
found by solving
. (5-138)
The step can be computed in a numerically stable way via the Singular Value
Decomposition (SVD) [27] of :
. (5-139)
The parameter update is then given by
. (5-140)
If is not of full rank, then is singular, and a truncated SVD should be used in
order to compute (5-140). This occurs for example when an overparametrized model is
utilized.
e θ Z,( )
∇2V ∂2V θ Z,( )
θ∂ 2------------------------ 2JT θ Z,( )J θ Z,( ) 2 ek θ Z,( )
∂2ek θ Z,( )
θ∂ 2-------------------------
k 1=
N
∑+= =
∇V∂V θ Z,( )
θ∂--------------------- 2JT θ Z,( )e θ Z,( )= =
J θ Z,( ) e θ Z,( ) θ
J θ Z,( ) e θ Z,( )∂θ∂
--------------------=
ek θ Z,( )
∂2V θ Z,( )θ∂ 2
------------------------ 2JT θ Z,( )J θ Z,( )≅
∆θ
JT θ Z,( )J θ Z,( )∆θ JT θ Z,( )e θ Z,( )–=
∆θ
J θ Z,( )
J θ Z,( ) UΣVT=
∆θ V– Σ 1– Ue θ Z,( )=
J θ Z,( ) Σ 1–
![Page 151: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/151.jpg)
Identification of the PNLSS Model
135
The convergence rate of the Gauss-Newton algorithm depends on the assumption that the
residuals are small. If this is the case, then the convergence rate is quadratic,
otherwise it can become supralinear. The main drawback of the Gauss-Newton algorithm is its
smaller region of convergence compared to the gradient method.
C. The Levenberg-Marquardt Algorithm
The Levenberg-Marquardt algorithm [36],[42] combines the large convergence region of the
gradient descent method with the fast convergence of the Gauss-Newton method. In order to
increase the numerical stability and to avoid comparing apples with oranges, the columns of
the Jacobian matrix need to be normalized prior to the computation of the parameter
update. The normalized Jacobian matrix is given by
, (5-141)
where the diagonal normalization matrix is defined as
. (5-142)
In most cases, the normalization yields in a better condition number (i.e., the ratio between
the largest and the smallest non zero singular value) for compared with .
Next, the parameter update is computed by solving the equation
, (5-143)
where the damping factor determines the weight between the two methods. If has a
large numerical value, then the second term in (5-143) is important, and hence the gradient
descent method dominates. When is small, the Gauss-Newton method takes over.
In order to compute (5-143) in a numerically stable way, the SVD of is calculated
first. When the Jacobian is singular, has rank and the SVD is given by
. (5-144)
ek θ Z,( )
J θ Z,( )
JN θ Z,( )
JN θ Z,( ) J θ Z,( )N=
N �nθ nθ×
∈
N diag1
rms J : 1,[ ] θ Z,( )( )------------------------------------------ … 1
rms J : nθ,[ ] θ Z,( )( )--------------------------------------------, ,
⎝ ⎠⎜ ⎟⎛ ⎞
=
JN θ Z,( ) J θ Z,( )
∆θN
JNT θ Z,( )JN θ Z,( ) λ2Inθ
+( )∆θN JNT θ Z,( )e θ Z,( )–=
λ λ
λ
JN θ Z,( )
JN θ Z,( ) nθ nθ<
JN θ Z,( ) Udiag σ1 σ2 … σnθ0 …
0, , , , , ,⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞VT=
![Page 152: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/152.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
136
Next, the parameter update is calculated using a truncated SVD. This results in
, (5-145)
where the matrix is defined as
. (5-146)
In the last step, the parameter update needs to be denormalized again:
. (5-147)
As a starting value for , the largest singular value of from the first iteration can be
used [25]. Next, is adjusted according to the success of the parameter update. When the
cost function decreases, the approximation made in (5-137) works well. Hence, should be
decreased such that the Gauss-Newton influence becomes more important. Conversely, when
the cost function increases, the gradient descent method should gain more weight: this is
obtained by increasing .
Different stop criteria can be employed to bring the iterative Levenberg-Marquardt algorithm
to an end. For instance, the optimization can be broken off when the relative decrease of the
cost function becomes smaller than a user-chosen value, or when the relative update of the
parameter vector becomes too small. However, the most simple approach is to stop the
optimization when a sufficiently high number of iterations is exceeded. A full
optimization scheme that makes use of this stop criterion is shown in Figure 5-14. In practice,
we will also evaluate the cost function on the validation set, and choose the model which
performs best on this data set (see “Overfitting and Validation” on p. 127).
∆θN
∆θN VΛUTe θ Z,( )–=
Λ
Λ diagσ1
σ12 λ2+
-------------------σ2
σ22 λ2+
------------------- …σnθ
σnθ2 λ2+
--------------------- 0 … 0, , , , , ,
⎝ ⎠⎜ ⎟⎛ ⎞
=
∆θN
∆θ N∆θN=
λ JN θ Z,( )
λ
λ
λ
imax
![Page 153: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/153.jpg)
Identification of the PNLSS Model
137
Initialize θ
Compute
Vtest V<
Compute V θ Z,( )
Vtest θtest Z,( )
θtest θ ∆θ+=
λ λ 12---×=
noyes
Figure 5-14. Levenberg-Marquardt algorithm.
i 1=
λ 1–=
i imax<
yes
noStop
λ 1–=yes
no
λ S 1 1,( )=
i i 1+=
i imax>or
λ λ 10×=
V Vtest=
θ θtest=
Compute J
U S V, ,[ ] svd JN( )=
Normalize J
∆θNCompute
Denormalize ∆θN
![Page 154: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/154.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
138
D. Dealing with Complex Data
Suppose the following cost function needs to be minimized:
, (5-148)
with a complex residual. can be rewritten as
, (5-149)
where is defined as
. (5-150)
Furthermore, the matrix is defined as
. (5-151)
The matrices and are thus real matrices which allows us to recycle the
ideas described in section C.
E. Weighted Least Squares
In general, a Weighted Least Squares (WLS) cost function is defined as
, (5-152)
where is a Hermitian, positive definite weighting matrix. Any Hermitian positive
(semi-)definite matrix can be decomposed as [27]:
, (5-153)
where the square root matrix is also Hermitian. Using the SVD of ,
can be calculated straightforwardly:
V θ Z,( )
V θ Z,( ) εH θ Z,( )ε θ Z,( ) εk θ Z,( ) 2
k 1=
N
∑= =
ε θ Z,( ) �N∈ V θ Z,( )
V θ Z,( ) εreT θ Z,( )εre θ Z,( )=
εre θ Z,( )
εre θ Z,( ) Re ε θ Z,( )( )Im ε θ Z,( )( )
=
Jre θ Z,( )
Jre θ Z,( ) Re J θ Z,( )( )Im J θ Z,( )( )
=
εre θ Z,( ) Jre θ Z,( )
VWLS θ Z,( ) εH θ Z,( )Wε θ Z,( )=
W �N N×∈
W W1 2/ W1 2/=
W1 2/ W UΣVT= W1 2/
![Page 155: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/155.jpg)
Identification of the PNLSS Model
139
. (5-154)
For real matrices, a similar result holds:
. (5-155)
Equation (5-152) can thus be rewritten as
, (5-156)
or
, (5-157)
with
. (5-158)
The Jacobian of is then given by
. (5-159)
In this way, we recast the WLS problem such that it can be solved using the techniques from
section C and D.
W1 2/ VΣ1 2/ VH W1 2/( )H= =
W1 2/ VΣ1 2/ VT W1 2/( )T= =
VWLS θ Z,( ) εH θ Z,( ) W 1 2/
⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞H
W1 2/ ε θ Z,( ) W 1 2/ ε θ Z,( )⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞HW1 2/ ε θ Z,( )= =
VWLS θ Z,( ) εH θ Z,( )ε θ Z,( )=
ε θ Z,( ) W1 2/ ε θ Z,( )=
ε θ Z,( )
J θ Z,( ) ε θ Z,( )∂θ∂
-------------------- W1 2/ ε θ Z,( )( )∂θ∂
-------------------------------------- W1 2/ J θ Z,( )= = =
![Page 156: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/156.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
140
Appendix 5.D Explicit Expressions for the PNLSS Jacobian
In this appendix, we compute explicit expressions for the derivatives of the model output (5-
104) with respect to the parameters . We first define the matrices and
as
(5-160)
denotes a zero matrix with a single element equal to one at entry :
(5-161)
We begin by computing the Jacobian with respect to the elements of the matrix . The
derivative of the output equation with respect to is given by:
(5-162)
In order to determine the right hand side of (5-162), we also need the derivatives of the state
equation which are given by
. (5-163)
We define as
θ ζ' t( ) �nζ na×
∈
η' t( ) �nη na×
∈
ζ' t( ) ζ t( )∂x t( )∂
------------ζ t( )∂x1 t( )∂
--------------- … ζ t( )∂xna
t( )∂-----------------= =
η' t( ) η t( )∂x t( )∂
-------------η t( )∂x1 t( )∂
--------------- … η t( )∂xna
t( )∂-----------------= =
Iijm n×
�m n×∈ i j,( )
Iijm n×
0 … 0 … 0
… … … … …0 … 1 … 0
… … … … …0 … 0 … 0
i
j
=
Aij A
Aij
y t( )∂Aij∂
------------Aij∂∂
Cx t( ) Du t( ) Fη t( )+ +( )=
Cx t( )∂Aij∂
------------ Fη' t( ) x t( )∂Aij∂
------------+=
x t 1+( )∂Aij∂
---------------------Aij∂∂
Ax t( ) Bu t( ) Eζ t( )+ +( )=
xAijt( ) �
na∈
![Page 157: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/157.jpg)
Identification of the PNLSS Model
141
. (5-164)
Then, equation (5-163) is rewritten as
. (5-165)
Combining equations (5-162) and (5-165) results in
(5-166)
where is defined as
(5-167)
The Jacobian of the other model parameters are computed in a similar way. We summarize
the results below:
(5-168)
xAijt( ) x t( )∂
Aij∂------------=
xAijt 1+( ) Iij
na na×x t( ) A Eζ' t( )+( )xAij
t( )+=
xAijt 1+( ) Iij
na na×x t( ) A Eζ' t( )+( )xAij
t( )+=
JAijt( ) C Fη' t( )+( )xAij
t( )=⎩⎪⎨⎪⎧
JAijt( ) �
ny∈
JAijt( ) y t( )∂
Aij∂------------=
xAijt 1+( ) Iij
na na×x t( ) A Eζ' t( )+( )xAij
t( )+=
JAijt( ) C Fη' t( )+( )xAij
t( )=⎩⎪⎨⎪⎧
xBijt 1+( ) Iij
na nu×u t( ) A Eζ' t( )+( )xBij
t( )+=
JBijt( ) C Fη' t( )+( )xBij
t( )=⎩⎪⎨⎪⎧
xEijt 1+( ) Iij
na nζ×ζ t( ) A Eζ' t( )+( )xEij
t( )+=
JEijt( ) C Fη' t( )+( )xEij
t( )=⎩⎪⎨⎪⎧
JCijt( ) Iij
ny na×x t( )=
JDijt( ) Iij
ny nu×u t( )=
JFijt( ) Iij
ny nη×η t( )=
![Page 158: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/158.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
142
Appendix 5.E Computation of the Jacobian regarded as an alternative PNLSS system
It is clear from (5-168) that the computation of , , and is equivalent to
calculating the output of an alternative PNLSS system. We consider here, for instance, the
calculation of and we will attempt to write equations (5-166) in the following form:
(5-169)
For this, we define the new inputs, states and outputs as follows:
(5-170)
A number of relations between the original and the new system matrices are trivial:
(5-171)
The remaining system matrices and monomials require slightly more effort to determine. The
goal of the following calculations is to rewrite the terms and as
and , respectively. The time indices will be omitted for the sake of simplicity.
Using the multinomial notation and with multi-index defined as the power of the -th
monomial , we have:
. (5-172)
Next, we derive expressions for . The derivative of with respect to the state
variable is equal to . We can neglect the presence of the factor when is
not present in a given monomial, since the corresponding is in that case equal to zero.
Hence, we obtain the following relation:
JAijt( ) JBij
t( ) JEijt( )
JAijt( )
x t 1+( ) Ax t( ) Bu t( ) Eζ t( )+ +=
y t( ) Cx t( ) Fη t( )+=⎩⎨⎧
u t( ) x t( )u t( )
= x t( ) xAijt( )= y t( ) JAij
t( )=
A A= C C= B Iij 0na nu×= D 0=
Eζ' t( )x t( ) Fη' t( )x t( )
Eζ t( ) Fη t( )
αj j
ζj
ζζ1
…ζnζ
uα1
…
uαnζ
= =
ζ'ζ∂x∂
-----= ζj
xi αj i( )ζjxi1– xi
1– xi
αj i( )
![Page 159: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/159.jpg)
Identification of the PNLSS Model
143
(5-173)
Then, the product is given by
. (5-174)
We define the new -th monomial as
, (5-175)
which allows to rewrite (5-174) as
. (5-176)
This leads to the definition of the new matrix :
(5-177)
ζ'
α1 1( )ζ1x11– … α1 na( )ζ1xna
1–
… … …αnζ
1( )ζnζx1
1– … αnζna( )ζnζ
xna
1–
=
ζ'x
ζ'x
α1 1( )ζ1 … α1 na( )ζ1
… … …αnζ
1( )ζnζ… αnζ
na( )ζnζ
x1x11–
…xna
xna
1–
=
j ζj˜
ζj˜ ζj
x1x11–
…xna
xna
1–
ζj
x1u11–
…
xnauna
1–
= =
ζ'x
α1 0 … 0
0 α2 … 0
… … … …0 0 … αnζ
ζ1
ζ2
…
ζnζ
=
E
E E
α1 0 … 0
0 α2 … 0
… … … …0 0 … αnζ
=
![Page 160: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/160.jpg)
Chapter 5: Nonlinear State Space Modelling of Multivariable Systems
144
![Page 161: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/161.jpg)
145
CHAPTER 6
APPLICATIONS OF THE
POLYNOMIAL NONLINEAR
STATE SPACE MODEL
In this chapter, the nonlinear state space approach is applied to a
number of real-life systems: the Silverbox, a combine harvester, a
semi-active damper, a quarter car set-up, a robot arm, a Wiener-
Hammerstein system, and a crystal detector. For each case study, the
Device Under Test (DUT) and the performed experiments are
described. Next, the Best Linear Approximation is estimated and a
nonlinear state space model is built. Whenever possible, we compare
our approach with other modelling methods.
![Page 162: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/162.jpg)
Chapter 6: Applications of the Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Model
146
6.1 Silverbox
6.1.1 Description of the DUT
The Silverbox is an electronic circuit that emulates the behaviour of a mass-spring-damper
system (Figure 6-1). The input of the system is the force applied to the mass ; the
output represents the mass displacement. The spring acts nonlinearly and is characterized
by the parameters and . Since is positive, the spring is hardening. This means that
relatively more force is required as the spring is extended. The equation that describes the
system’s behaviour is given by
. (6-1)
The parameter determines the damping which is present in the system. For a sinusoidal
input , (6-1) is also known as the Duffing equation (see “Duffing Oscillator” on p. 111).
6.1.2 Description of the Experiments
The applied excitation signal consists of two parts (Figure 6-2). The first part of the signal is
filtered Gaussian white noise with a linearly increasing RMS value as a function of time. This
sequence consists of 40 700 samples and has a bandwidth of 200 Hz. The average RMS value
of the signal is 22.3 mV. This data set will be used to validate the models. The second part of
the excitation signal contains 10 realizations of an odd random phase multisine with 8192
samples and 500 transient points per realization. The bandwidth of the excitation signal is also
200 Hz and its RMS value is 22.3 mV. This sequence is applied once to the system under test
and will be used to estimate the models. In all experiments, the input and output signals are
measured at a sampling frequency of 10 MHz/214 = 610.35 Hz.
uc m
yc
k1 k3 k3
my··c t( ) dy·c t( ) k1yc t( ) k3yc3 t( )+ + + uc t( )=
d
uc t( )
Figure 6-1. Mass-spring-damper system.
uc
d
k1 k3,
m
![Page 163: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/163.jpg)
Silverbox
147
6.1.3 Best Linear Approximation
In order to obtain a nonparametric estimate of the Best Linear Approximation (BLA), the FRF
is determined for every phase realization of the estimation data set. The BLA is
then calculated by averaging those FRFs. Next, a parametric second order linear state space
model is estimated. From this model, initial values will be extracted in order to estimate some
nonlinear models. The results are plotted in Figure 6-3: the top and bottom plot show the
amplitude and phase of the BLA, respectively. The solid black line denotes the BLA; the solid
grey line represents the linear model. The total standard deviation is also given
(black dashed line), together with the model error (dashed grey line), i.e., the difference
between the measured BLA and the linear model.
Unfortunately, only one period per realization was measured. Hence, no distinction can be
made between the nonlinear contributions and the measurement noise (see “Periodic Data”
on p. 28).
From Figure 6-3, we observe that the linear model is of good quality: up to a frequency of
120 Hz, the model error coincides with the standard deviation. A statistically significant, but
small model error is present in the frequency band between 120 Hz and 200 Hz. This error is
surprising, because equation (6-1) corresponds to a linear, second order system when
omitting the nonlinear term . To explain this behaviour, the way the measurements
0 50 100 150 200
0.15
0.1
0.05
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
Input
Sig
nal [V
]
Time [s]
Figure 6-2. Excitation signal that contains a validation and an estimation set.
EstimationValidation
GBLA jωk( )
σBLA k( )
k3yc3 t( )
![Page 164: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/164.jpg)
Chapter 6: Applications of the Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Model
148
were made should be taken into account. A band-limited (BL) set-up was employed during the
measurements [56]. Hence, a discrete-time, second order model does not suffice to model
this continuous-time, second order system. Although the model error disappears for a third
order model, we will neglect it and continue with the second order model.
The second data set is now used to validate the linear model. The measured output of the
system is plotted in Figure 6-4 (black line) together with the simulation error (grey line). The
RMS value of the simulation error (RMSE) is 13.7 mV. This number should be compared to the
RMS output level that measures 53.4 mV.
0 50 100 150 20060
40
20
0
20Am
plit
ude [
dB]
Frequency [Hz]
Figure 6-3. BLA of the Silverbox (solid black line); Total standard deviation (black dashed line); 2nd order linear model (solid grey line); Model error (dashed grey line).
0 50 100 150 200180
135
90
45
0
Phase
[º]
Frequency [Hz]
![Page 165: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/165.jpg)
Silverbox
149
6.1.4 Nonlinear Model
Now, we will investigate whether better modelling results can be obtained with a nonlinear
model. First, a second order polynomial nonlinear state space (PNLSS) model is estimated
with the following settings:
(6-2)
and
. (6-3)
Hence, the nonlinear degree in the state equation is nx=[2 3]. We include all cross products
of the states and the input. In the output equation, only the linear terms are present (ny=0).
This results in a nonlinear model that contains 37 parameters.
The validation results for this nonlinear model are shown in Figure 6-5. Again, the measured
output signal is denoted by the black line; the simulation error of the nonlinear model is
plotted in grey. The RMS value of the model error has dropped significantly from 13.7 mV for
the linear model to 0.26 mV for the nonlinear model. Hence, the second order polynomial
nonlinear state space model performs more than a factor 50 better than the linear one. The
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0.2
0.1
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
Am
plit
ude [
V]
Time [s]
RMSE: 13.7 mV
Figure 6-4. Validation result for the 2nd order linear model:measured output (black) and model simulation error (grey).
ξ t( ) x1 t( ) x2 t( ) u t( )T
=
ζ t( ) ξ t( ) 3{ }= η t( ) 0=
![Page 166: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/166.jpg)
Chapter 6: Applications of the Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Model
150
spectra of the measured validation output signal (black), linear simulation error (light grey),
and nonlinear simulation error (dark grey) are shown in Figure 6-6. The errors of the linear
model are particularly present around the resonance frequency (approximately 60 Hz), i.e.,
for large signal amplitudes. The errors of the nonlinear model are concentrated around the
resonance frequency and close to DC.
Higher model orders and degrees of nonlinearity were also tried out, but none of them gave
better results than this second order nonlinear model. We also estimated some state affine
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0.2
0.1
0
0.1
0.2
0.3Am
plit
ude [
V]
Time [s]
RMSE: 0.26 mV
Figure 6-5. Validation result for the best nonlinear model:measured output (black) and model simulation error (grey).
0 50 100 150 200 250 300100
80
60
40
20
0
Am
plit
ude [
dBV]
Frequency [Hz]
Figure 6-6. DFT spectra of the measured validation output signal (black), linear simulation error (light grey), and nonlinear simulation error (dark grey).
![Page 167: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/167.jpg)
Silverbox
151
models (see “State Affine Models” on p. 89) of various orders and degrees. In Table 6-1, the
validation results for such models of degree 3 and 4 are summarized.
It is clear that the state affine approach yields unsatisfying results on the Silverbox data set. A
possible reason for the poor performance is that the state affine approach approximates the
nonlinear behaviour of a system by polynomial functions of the input, while the nonlinear
behaviour of the Silverbox mainly consists of a nonlinear feedback of the output. As a result,
high system orders are required in order to obtain a good model [69].
6.1.5 Comparison with Other Approaches
At the Symposium of Nonlinear Control Systems (Nolcos) in 2004, a special session was
organized around the Silverbox device. The aim was to compare different modelling
approaches applied to the same nonlinear device, using the same experimental data. In all
the papers participating to this session, the multisine and the Gaussian noise data set were
used for estimation and validation, respectively. Before continuing, a warning concerning the
validation data is appropriate. As can be seen from Figure 6-2, the amplitude of the last part
of the validation input exceeds the amplitude of the estimation data. Hence, for this part of
the validation data, extrapolation will occur. It is important to emphasize that the performance
achieved in this region is not a good measure for the model quality. It is rather a matter of
“luck”: if there is an exact correspondence between the internal structure of the DUT and the
model structure, this will generally yield in good extrapolation behaviour. But if this is not the
case, and the estimated model is only an approximation, the extrapolation will in general be
Model Order
State Affinedegree 3
State Affinedegree 4
ValidationRMSE [mV]
Number of parameters
ValidationRMSE [mV]
Number of parameters
n=2 9.12 23 9.12 32n=3 10.51 39 7.51 55n=4 9.40 59 10.04 84n=5 6.22 83 9.47 119n=6 12.65 111 13.15 160n=7 11.81 143 12.77 207
Table 6-1. Validation results for state affine models of degree 3 and 4.
![Page 168: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/168.jpg)
Chapter 6: Applications of the Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Model
152
poor. Therefore, the extrapolation behaviour should be discarded in a fair assessment. Note
that the danger of extrapolation also resides in the use of too small amplitudes (for instance
dead zones, which become relatively more important for smaller inputs).
Among the papers, we distinguish three methodologies. The first one is a white box approach
(H. Hjalmarsson [29], J. Paduart [52]), making explicit use of the knowledge about the
internal structure of the Silverbox device. M. Espinoza [22], L. Sragner [76], and V. Verdult
[81] employ a black box approach. Finally, the paper of L. Ljung [39] shows results for black
box and grey box modelling. In the following, we will briefly describe each methodology.
In [29], the internal block structure of the Silverbox is reordered to turn it into a MISO
Hammerstein system. An existing relaxation method for Hammerstein-Wiener systems
(published by E. Bai [1]) is extended to MISO systems, and applied to the Silverbox device.
The model obtained with this method achieves a validation RMSE of 0.96 mV.
Another white box approach is presented in [52]. In Chapter 4, the ideas from this paper are
elaborated. The RMSE on the validation set is 0.38 mV.
In [22], Least Squares Support Vector Machines (LS-SVM) for nonlinear regression are applied
to model the Silverbox. The idea here is to consider a model where the inputs are mapped to
a high dimensional feature space with a nonlinear mapping . This feature space is converted
to a low dimensional dual space by means of a positive definite kernel . As the final model
is expressed as a function of , there is no need to compute explicitly. Furthermore, the
dual space allows to estimate the model parameters by solving a linear least squares problem
under equality constraints. In [22], polynomial kernels are used on the Silverbox data,
yielding a validation result of 0.32 mV. An even better model is obtained in [23] using a
partially linear model (PL-LS-SVM): 0.27 mV. This approach includes the prior knowledge that
linear regressors are present in the model.
The model used in [81] is a state space model, composed of a weighted sum of two local
second order linear models (LLM). The weights are a function of a scheduling vector, which is
chosen equal to the output of the system for this particular DUT. A typical choice for the
�
K
K �
![Page 169: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/169.jpg)
Silverbox
153
weighting functions are radial basis functions which are also used in [81]. The validation result
obtained here is 1.3 mV.
In [76], different types of Artificial Neural Networks (ANN) are assessed: Multi-Layer
Perceptron (MLP) Networks and Networks, both making use of hyperbolic tangent base
functions. In both cases, the maximal time lag for the input and the output is chosen equal to
5. The MLP Network has one hidden layer and contains 60 neurons. The Network has 20
multiplicative and 20 additive elements. The best model is a special MLP Network with only 10
hidden neurons, which also makes use of linear regressors. This results in a RMSE of 7.8 mV.
A whole arsenal of different black and grey box techniques are applied in [39], such as neural
networks, wavenets, block-oriented models, and physical models. The best result is achieved
by a one hidden layer sigmoidal neural network with 30 neurons, using input and output
regressors with a maximal time lag of 10. Note that a custom, cubic regressor is included,
which improves the results significantly. This leads to a RMSE of 0.30 mV.
In Table 6-2, the validation RMSE and the number of required parameters are summarized for
the different approaches.
From Table 6-2, we conclude that the physical models achieve reasonable validation RMSE
values. The main advantage of this approach is the small number of parameters, and the
ability to give a physical interpretation to the identified parameters. In general, the black and
deep-grey box models show the lowest RMSE values. The price paid for their excellent
Author Approach ValidationRMSE [mV]
Number ofparameters
J. Paduart PNLSS 0.26 37H. Hjalmarsson, [29] Physical block-oriented model 0.96 5
J. Paduart, [52] Physical block-oriented model 0.38 10M. Espinoza, [22] LS-SVM with NARX 0.32 490M. Espinoza, [23] PL-LS-SVM with PL-NARX 0.27 190L. Sragner, [76] MLP-ANN 7.8 600V. Verdult, [81] Local Linear State Space model 1.3 16L. Ljung, [39] NL ARX model 0.30 712
Table 6-2. Validation results for various modelling approaches.
ΣΠ
ΣΠ
![Page 170: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/170.jpg)
Chapter 6: Applications of the Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Model
154
performance is the higher number of parameters they require. An exception to the rule in
Table 6-2 are the MLP neural networks. Several reasons can cause their poor performance for
this particular set-up. First of all, the hyperbolic tangent functions used in the ANN approach
do not exploit the polynomial behaviour of the Silverbox. Secondly, it could be that the neural
network was not properly initialized, or that the nonlinear search used in the estimation
procedure got stuck in a local minimum. We obtained a good result with the polynomial
nonlinear state space model: a low RMSE value (0.26 mV), and a reasonable number of
parameters (37). The reason why our approach works so well is due to the correspondence
between the PNLSS model and the internal structure of the Silverbox, which basically consists
of a cubic feedback of the output (see “Nonlinear Feedback” on p. 106). This match is a clear
advantage in a validation test that requires extrapolation. To conclude, three black box models
clearly stand out in this comparison, with RMSE values close to the noise level of 0.25 mV.
This level was obtained from another data set, in similar experimental conditions.
![Page 171: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/171.jpg)
Combine Harvester
155
6.2 Combine Harvester
6.2.1 Description of the DUT
The system that we will model in this section is a New Holland CR-960 combine harvester (see
Figure 6-7). Note that there is no grain header mounted at the front side of the harvester. We
will use measurements performed by ir. Tom Coen from the KULeuven, Faculty of Bioscience
Engineering, Department MeBioS. A block scheme of the traction system of the machine is
shown in Figure 6-8. The black connections denote mechanical transmissions; the grey
connection is part of the hydrostatic transmission. The diesel engine delivers the traction
power and is coupled to a hydrostatic pump which on its turn drives a hydrostatic engine. The
speed of the diesel engine is kept at the requested set point by a regulator which varies the
fuel injection. The flow of the hydrostatic pump is controlled by an electric current. The power
is then transferred to the front axle through the mechanical gearbox and the front differential.
The traction system to be modelled has two inputs and one output. The first input is the
steering current of the hydrostatic pump; the second input is the speed setting of the diesel
engine. The engine speed is limited between 1300 and 2100 rotations per minute (rpm); the
steering current of the hydrostatic pump can be varied between 0 % and 100 %. The output
of this MISO system is the measured driving speed, expressed in km/h. A detailed analysis of
Figure 6-7. Combine harvester.
![Page 172: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/172.jpg)
Chapter 6: Applications of the Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Model
156
the expected system order of the traction system is presented in [9]. The dynamic behaviour
is mainly located in the pump, and consists of three second order subsystems. A part of these
dynamics can be neglected as they are relatively fast; hence the required model order turned
out to be four.
6.2.2 Description of the Experiments
All experiments were performed on the road, with the gearbox fixed in the second gear. Two
sets of orthogonal random odd, random phase multisines were generated (see “Periodic Data”
on p. 34). Hence, a total of 4 realizations were applied to both input channels. Each
realization consisted of two periods of 4096 samples each, and 192 transient samples. The
RMS value of the multisines for the first and second input were 57% and 1715 rpm,
respectively. The bandwidth of the excitation signals was 2 Hz and the sampling frequency
used in the experiments was 20 Hz. The first two realizations will be used to estimate the
models and the remaining two to validate them. Due to timing problems with the PXI
instrumentation system used to perform the experiments, the applied input signals were not
completely periodic. As a consequence, we cannot exploit the periodic nature of the original
signals to separate the measurement noise from the nonlinear contributions. Hence, we treat
the data sequences as if they were non periodic (see “Non Periodic Data” on p. 38).
6.2.3 Best Linear Approximation
To estimate the Multiple Input, Multiple Output (MISO) BLA and its covariance, we split the
estimation data ( samples) in subrecords of 524 samples.
DieselEngine
MechanicalGearbox
FrontAxle
SteeringCurrent
SpeedSetting
MachineSpeed
Figure 6-8. Traction system of the combine harvester.
HydrostaticEngine
HydrostaticPump
[rpm] [%] [km/h]
fs
2 2 4096× 192+( )× M 32=
![Page 173: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/173.jpg)
Combine Harvester
157
Then, we compute the auto- and cross spectra with equation (2-24). Finally, the BLA is
obtained with equation (2-41), and its covariance with equation (2-43). Next, a 4th, 5th, and
6th order linear model is estimated with a subspace method (see “Frequency Domain
Subspace Identification” on p. 115) from the BLA and its covariance matrix. The subspace
method is then followed by a nonlinear optimization. Figure 6-9 shows the BLA (solid black
line) and the total standard deviation (dashed black line), together with the 6th order linear
model (solid grey line) and the amplitude of the complex model error (dashed grey line). G11
is the transfer function from the steering current (input 1) to the measured speed (output 1);
G12 is the transfer function from the diesel engine’s speed setting (input 2) to the measured
speed (output 1). Next, a validation test is carried out with the 6th order linear model. In
0 0.5 1 1.5 270
60
50
40
30
20
10
Frequency [Hz]
G11
Am
plit
ude [
dB]
0 0.5 1 1.5 290
80
70
60
50
40
Frequency [Hz]
G12
0 0.5 1 1.5 2
225
180
135
90
45
0
Frequency [Hz]
G11
Phase
[°]
0 0.5 1 1.5 2
225
180
135
90
45
0
Frequency [Hz]
G12
Figure 6-9. The MISO BLA (G11 and G12) of the combine harvester (solid black line); Total standard deviation (dashed black line); 6th order linear model (solid grey line);
Model error (dashed grey line).
![Page 174: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/174.jpg)
Chapter 6: Applications of the Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Model
158
Figure 6-10, the model error for the validation data is shown (grey) together with the
measured output (black). The validation data consists of two merged multisine realizations.
Therefore, two transient phenomena are present in the model error: one at the start of the
data set and one around 400 s. For the calculation of the RMSE (0.73 km/h), we discard 200
samples at the start of each realization in order to eliminate the effect of the transients. When
taking a closer look at the simulation error, we observe periodic residuals. This effect can be
caused by periodic disturbances (e.g. coupling with 50 Hz mains), or by unmodelled dynamics
(since a quasi-periodic excitation signal was employed). In the next section, it will become
clear that there are unmodelled dynamics.
6.2.4 Nonlinear Model
For the nonlinear modelling, we use as starting values the 4th, 5th, and 6th order linear model
obtained in the previous step. Two types of nonlinear state space models are considered:
polynomial nonlinear models and state affine models. For the polynomial models, we have
observed that a nonlinear output equation does not enhance the modelling results. Therefore,
we only show the results for models with a linear output equation ( ). We also have
noticed that the nonlinear combinations with the inputs in the state equation do not improve
the results. Hence, these terms are omitted in what follows. The validation RMSE of the
estimated polynomial nonlinear models is shown in Table 6-3 (left: , and right:
). From this table, it is clear that the RMSE decreases for higher model orders,
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
2
0
2
4
6
8
10
12Speed [
km
/h]
Time [s]
RMSE: 0.73 km/h
Figure 6-10. Validation result for the 6th order linear model:measured output (black) and model simulation error (grey).
η t( ) 0=
ζ t( ) x t( ) 3( )=
ζ t( ) x t( ) 3{ }=
![Page 175: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/175.jpg)
Combine Harvester
159
while the number of parameters increases significantly. The best result achieved with the
polynomial nonlinear approach is a RMSE of 0.35 km/h using a 6th order model with nx=[3].
The validation error of this model is shown in Figure 6-11 (grey), together with the measured
output (black). The two transients are discarded in the same way as described in the previous
section. Figure 6-12 shows the spectra of the measured validation output (black), the linear
simulation error (light grey), and the nonlinear simulation error (dark grey). From this plot, we
observe that the nonlinear model reduces the linear model error between DC and 1 Hz, but
for higher frequencies no significant improvement is obtained.
Furthermore, state affine models of degree 3 and 4 are also estimated. The validation results
for these models are shown in Table 6-4. A 5th order model of degree 3 yields the best result
(0.39 km/h). No clear trends are visible in Table 6-4; the results are comparable to what we
PNLSSnx=[3], ny=[]
PNLSSnx=[2 3], ny=[]
Model Order
ValidationRMSE [km/h]
Number of parameters
ValidationRMSE [km/h]
Number of parameters
n=4 0.63 94 0.63 134n=5 0.57 192 0.54 267n=6 0.35 356 0.36 482
Table 6-3. Validation results for the polynomial nonlinear state space models.
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
2
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
Speed [
km
/h]
Time [s]
RMSE: 0.35 km/h
Figure 6-11. Validation result for the best nonlinear model:measured output (black) and model simulation error (grey).
![Page 176: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/176.jpg)
Chapter 6: Applications of the Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Model
160
obtained with the polynomial nonlinear state space models. Hence, both approaches perform
equally well.
State Affinedegree 3
State Affinedegree 4
Model Order
ValidationRMSE [km/h]
Number of parameters
ValidationRMSE [km/h]
Number of parameters
n=4 0.46 149 0.45 254n=5 0.39 209 0.40 359n=6 0.41 279 0.44 482
Table 6-4. Validation results for state affine models of degree 3 and 4.
0 2 4 6 8 1040
20
0
20
40Am
plit
ude [
dBkm
/h]
Frequency [Hz]
Figure 6-12. DFT spectra of the measured validation output signal (black), linear simulation error (light grey), and nonlinear simulation error (dark grey).
![Page 177: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/177.jpg)
Semi-active Damper
161
6.3 Semi-active Damper
6.3.1 Description of the DUT
This application concerns the modelling of a magneto-rheological (MR) damper. This damper
is called semi-active, because the characteristics of the viscous fluid inside the damper is
influenced by a magnetic field. Hence, the relation between the force over the damper and
the position/velocity of the piston is changed.
Two quantities serve as input to this system: the reference signal applied to the PID controller
to regulate the piston position via the shaker, and the current which determines the magnetic
field over the viscous fluid. As system output, we consider the force over the damper, which is
measured by a load cell. The measurement set-up is shown in Figure 6-13. For an ideal, linear
damper, we expect to obtain an improper first order model, i.e., the theoretical relationship
between displacement and force for a perfect damper. Due to the non-idealities of the device,
the required model order will turn out to be higher.
6.3.2 Description of the Experiments
Both the construction of the set-up and the measurements were carried out by ir. Kris
Smolders from the PMA Department of the KULeuven. He applied three realizations of a full
grid, random phase multisine to the DUT. The multisines were excited in a frequency band
between 0.12 Hz and 10 Hz, and 6 periods per realization were measured with 65 536
samples per period. In all the measurements, a sampling frequency of 2000 Hz was used.
damper
viscous fluid
load cellshaker
Figure 6-13. Measurement set-up of the magneto-rheological damper.
pistoncurrent
fs
![Page 178: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/178.jpg)
Chapter 6: Applications of the Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Model
162
A slow DC trend present in the measured output data was removed prior to the estimation
procedures. After removal of the DC levels, the signals applied to the first (piston reference)
and second input (damper current) of the DUT have a RMS value of 39 mV and 194 mV,
respectively. The first two multisine realizations are used for the estimation of the models, and
the third realization for the validation.
6.3.3 Best Linear Approximation
First, we will estimate the device’s Best Linear Approximation. Unfortunately, only two
realizations were available. For a dual input system, this is sufficient to calculate the BLA, but
not enough to determine an estimate of the covariance. Hence, the approach described in
0 2 4 6 850
40
30
20
10
0
10
Frequency [Hz]
G11
Am
plit
ude [
dB]
0 2 4 6 850
40
30
20
10
0
10
Frequency [Hz]
G12
0 2 4 6 8
60
90
Frequency [Hz]
G11
Phase
[°]
0 2 4 6 8
270
180
90
0
90
180
270
Frequency [Hz]
G12
Figure 6-14. The MISO BLA (G11 and G12) of the semi-active damper (solid black line); 3rd order linear model (solid grey line); Total standard deviation (dashed black line);
Model error (dashed grey line).
![Page 179: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/179.jpg)
Semi-active Damper
163
“Periodic Data” on p. 34 is not suitable. Therefore, we employ the method described in “Non
Periodic Data” on p. 38 to determine the BLA from the averaged input/output data. We
compute the auto- and cross spectra with equation (2-24), with blocks of 4096
samples. Finally, the BLA is obtained with equation (2-41) and its covariance with equation (2-
43). Then, some linear models with different model orders (2nd to 5th order) are estimated
from the BLA and its covariance matrix, using a subspace method (see “Frequency Domain
Subspace Identification” on p. 115) which is followed by a nonlinear optimization. Figure 6-14
shows the MISO BLA (solid black line) and the total standard deviation (dashed black line),
together with the 3rd order linear model (solid grey line) and the amplitude of the complex
model error (dashed grey line). G11 is the transfer function from the piston reference (input 1)
to the measured force (output 1); G12 is the transfer function from the damper current (input
2) to the measured force (output 1). G11 behaves like expected for a damper: ideally, the
force over the damper should be proportional to the velocity of the piston, i.e., times the
displacement. This is, indeed, roughly what we observe for G11. Furthermore, from the top
plots it can be seen that the relative uncertainty on G12 is high compared with the one on G11.
Hence, the estimated linear model is mainly determined by G11. Next, a validation test is
carried out with the 3rd order linear model. In Figure 6-15, the model error for the validation
data is shown (grey), together with the measured output (black). The RMS value of the model
error (34 mV) is quite high compared with the RMS value of the measured output (71 mV).
We will reduce this error using nonlinear models.
M 32=
jω
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
0.2
0.1
0
0.1
0.2
Am
plit
ude [
V]
Time [s]
RMSE: 33.92 mV
Figure 6-15. Validation result for the 3rd order linear model:measured output (black) and model simulation error (grey).
![Page 180: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/180.jpg)
Chapter 6: Applications of the Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Model
164
6.3.4 Nonlinear Model
For the nonlinear modelling, we use as starting values the 2nd to 5th order linear models
obtained in the previous step. Again, two types of nonlinear state space models are
considered: PNLSS and state affine models. For the polynomial models, we have observed
that using a nonlinear relation for both the state and the output equation always yields better
modelling results. Hence, no linear state nor output equation is considered in what follows.
For the PNLSS model, we will make a distinction between two choices for the nonlinear
vectors and . First, we take into account all nonlinear combinations using the states
and the inputs (referred to as "full", , with ).
PNLSS, "full"nx=[2 3], ny=[2 3]
PNLSS, "states only"nx=[2 3], ny=[2 3]
Model Order
ValidationRMSE [mV]
Number of parameters
ValidationRMSE [mV]
Number of parameters
n=2 12.4 98 22.9 29n=3 8.2 211 8.9 75n=4 6.7 399 6.6 164n=5 9.7 689 10.3 317
Table 6-5. Validation results for the PNLSS models with (left) all the nonlinear combinations, and (right) without nonlinear combinations using the input.
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
0.2
0.1
0
0.1
0.2
Am
plit
ude [
V]
Time [s]
RMSE: 6.6 mV
Figure 6-16. Validation result for the best nonlinear model:measured output (black) and model simulation error (grey).
ζ t( ) η t( )
ζ t( ) η t( ) ξ t( ) 3{ }= = ξ t( ) x t( ) u t( );[ ]=
![Page 181: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/181.jpg)
Semi-active Damper
165
Secondly, we consider only the nonlinear combinations of the states, without the inputs
(referred to as "states only", ). The validation RMSE of the estimated
polynomial models is given in Table 6-5. It is clear that the RMSE decreases for higher model
orders up to n=4. We also conclude that taking into account the nonlinear combinations of
the input improves, on average, the RMSE at the price of a significantly higher number of
parameters. For the PNLSS approach, the best result is achieved using a “states only” 4th
order model with degree nx=[2 3], ny=[2 3], resulting in a RMSE of 6.6 mV. This is a
reduction of the model error with a factor 5 compared with the linear model. The validation
error for the best nonlinear model is given in Figure 6-16 (grey), together with the measured
output (black). Figure 6-17 shows the spectra of the measured validation output signal
(black), the linear simulation error (light grey), and the nonlinear simulation error (dark grey).
This plot illustrates that the nonlinear model squeezes down the model error over a broad
frequency range.
Furthermore, different state affine models of degree 3 and 4 are estimated. The validation
results for these models are given in Table 6-6. A 4th order model of degree 4 yields the best
result (13.5 mV).
For this DUT, the PNLSS approach performs clearly better than the state affine approach. By
employing a 4th order PNLSS model, the simulation error on the validation set was reduced
with more than a factor 5 compared with the BLA: from 34 mV to 6.6 mV. This result should
ζ t( ) η t( ) x t( ) 3{ }= =
0 50 100 150 20080
60
40
20
0
Am
plit
ude [
dBV]
Frequency [Hz]
Figure 6-17. DFT spectra of the measured validation output signal (black), linear simulation error (light grey), and nonlinear simulation error (dark grey).
![Page 182: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/182.jpg)
Chapter 6: Applications of the Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Model
166
be compared with the noise level (1.8 mV), which can easily be determined since several
periods of the measured data are available. Hence, it should be possible to reduce the model
error with an additional factor 3. However, it was not possible to achieve this with the PNLSS
approach. Maybe the nonlinear optimization got stuck in a local minimum, or the model order/
degree should be increased further in order to obtain better results.
State Affinedegree 3
State Affinedegree 4
Model Order
ValidationRMSE [mV]
Number of parameters
ValidationRMSE [mV]
Number of parameters
n=2 26.5 59 23.2 98n=3 17.7 99 17.1 167n=4 13.8 149 13.5 254n=5 14.5 209 30.2 359
Table 6-6. Validation results for different state affine models of degree 3 and 4.
![Page 183: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/183.jpg)
Quarter Car Set-up
167
6.4 Quarter Car Set-up
6.4.1 Description of the DUT
In this test case, we study a quarter car set-up which is situated at the PMA Department of
the KULeuven, and which was built by ir. Kris Smolders [72]. The set-up is a scale model of a
car suspension based on masses, springs, and the magneto-rheological damper that was
modelled in section 6.3.
The system is excited by a hydraulic shaker which emulates, by means of a PID controller, the
vertical road displacement. The reference signal for the position of the shaker serves as
system input. The force over the damper is considered as the system output and is measured
with a load cell, which is placed between the damper and the car mass. Taking into account
the various interactions between the masses, springs and damper, and the shaker dynamics,
the expected model order is about six (for a more elaborate discussion, see [72]).
6.4.2 Description of the Experiments
K. Smolders applied two realizations of a full grid, random phase multisine (RPM), which was
excited in a frequency band between 0.05 Hz and 10 Hz. Per multisine realization, 10 periods
load cell
Magneto-rheological damper
car mass
shaker
wheel mass
Figure 6-18. Quarter car set-up.
![Page 184: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/184.jpg)
Chapter 6: Applications of the Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Model
168
were measured, with 40 000 samples per period. Furthermore, a filtered Gaussian noise (GN)
sequence with a linearly increasing RMS value over time was applied to the system. This
signal consisted of about 280 000 data samples. The RMS value of the multisine and the noise
sequence are, respectively, 75 mV and 58 mV. Both data sets are shown in Figure 6-19. In the
plot on the right side, the RMS value of the RPM sequence is given (light grey line), together
with the RMS value of the GN data set (dark grey line). The latter is calculated per block of
8 000 samples. From this plot, we observe that the RMS value of the Gaussian noise sequence
exceeds the RMS value of the multisine data set around t=100 s. For larger values of t, we
end up in the extrapolation zone (grey block). In all the measurements, the current applied to
the semi-active damper was fixed to 1 A, and a sampling frequency of 2000 Hz was used.
Prior to the estimation, a slow DC trend that stems from the load cell sensor was removed
from all the measured data, using linear detrending. Originally, the RPM data set was intended
for the estimation, and the GN data set for the validation. However, this leads to poor
modelling results, even when the GN sequence is only used up to t=100 s. A possible
0 10 20 300.4
0.2
0
0.2
0.4(a) RPM data set
Am
plit
ude [
V]
Time [s]0 50 100
0.4
0.2
0
0.2
0.4(b) GN data set
Time [s]
Figure 6-19. (a) Random Phase Multisine data set, and (b) Gaussian Noise data set.RMS RPM (light grey line), RMS GN (dark grey line), and extrapolation zone (grey block).
0 10 20 30 40 50
40
20
0
(a) DFT Spectrum RPM signal
Frequency [Hz]0 10 20 30 40 50
40
20
0
(b) DFT Spectrum GN signal
Frequency [Hz]
Figure 6-20. DFT spectrum of (a) the RPM signal, and (b) the GN data set.
fs
![Page 185: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/185.jpg)
Quarter Car Set-up
169
explanation for this is the fact that the spectrum of the GN is broader than the RPM’s
spectrum (see Figure 6-20). Hence, we decided to interchange the roles of both data sets
such that spectral extrapolation is avoided: the GN data set serves now for the estimation of
the models, and the RPM data set for the validation.
6.4.3 Best Linear Approximation
Since the GN data set is employed for the estimation of the models, the approach described in
“Non Periodic Data” on p. 38 is employed to determine the BLA. First, we compute the auto-
and cross spectra with equation (2-24), with blocks of 8 000 samples. Then, the BLA
is obtained with equation (2-41) and its covariance with equation (2-43). From this data, 4th
to 6th order linear models are estimated using a subspace method (see “Frequency Domain
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 1630
20
10
0
10
20
Frequency [Hz]
Am
plit
ude [
dB]
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
90
0
90
Frequency [Hz]
Phase
[°]
Figure 6-21. BLA of the quarter car set-up (solid black line); Total standard deviation (black dashed line); 4th order linear model (solid grey line); Model error (dashed grey line).
M 34=
![Page 186: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/186.jpg)
Chapter 6: Applications of the Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Model
170
Subspace Identification” on p. 115), which is followed by a nonlinear optimization. Figure 6-
21 shows the BLA (solid black line) and the total standard deviation (dashed black line),
together with the 4th order linear model (solid grey line) and the amplitude of the complex
model error (dashed grey line). Next, the 4th order linear model is validated on the RPM data
set. In Figure 6-22, the simulation error for the validation data is given (grey) together with
the measured output (black). The RMS value of the model error (136 mV) is quite high
compared to the RMS value of the measured output (285 mV). Hence, we will try to reduce
this error with the PNLSS approach.
6.4.4 Nonlinear Model
In what follows, we only show the results for the PNLSS models. State affine models were
also estimated but are omitted here, since they yielded poor results. In Table 6-7, the
validation results are shown for PNLSS models of various orders, with a nonlinear state and
output equation. Two kinds of models are discussed: models that contain all the nonlinear
combinations of the states and the inputs (PNLSS, "full", ), and
models that only employ the nonlinear combinations of the states (PNLSS, “states only”,
). The entries that are indicated with “N.A.” correspond to models
which could not be estimated due to memory restrictions. To this matter, recall that the
estimation data set consists of about 280 000 data samples. The best validation result is
achieved by the 5th order model from the right hand side of the table, giving a simulation
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 351
0.5
0
0.5
1Am
plit
ude [
V]
Time [s]
RMSE: 136 mV
Figure 6-22. Validation result for the 4th order linear model:measured output (black) and model simulation error (grey).
ζ t( ) η t( ) ξ t( ) 3{ }= =
ζ t( ) η t( ) x t( ) 3{ }= =
![Page 187: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/187.jpg)
Quarter Car Set-up
171
error of 44 mV. Since the validation data are periodic and several periods were measured, we
can compare this figure to the noise level at the output, which is 1.8 mV. Apparently, a
significant amount of unmodelled dynamics is still present in the residuals, although the
model error decreased with more than a factor 3 compared with the linear model. Hence, this
DUT is an example where the PNLSS approach delivers unsatisfying results. A higher model
order or an increased nonlinear degree might improve the results, but the size of the data set
prevents the estimation of such models due to memory restrictions. Another possible
explanation for the poor result is that the polynomial approximation is not suited for this set-
up, e.g. due to the presence of hard saturation in the DUT. In Figure 6-24, the spectra of the
measured validation output signal (black), the linear simulation error (light grey), and the
nonlinear simulation error (dark grey) are shown. From this plot, it can be seen that a
significant model error reduction is achieved by the nonlinear model between DC and
approximately 50 Hz.
PNLSS, "full"nx=[2 3], ny=[2 3]
PNLSS, "states only"nx=[2 3], ny=[2 3]
Model Order
ValidationRMSE [mV]
Number of parameters
ValidationRMSE [mV]
Number of parameters
n=4 104 259 107 159n=5 N.A. N.A. 44 311n=6 N.A. N.A. 50 552
Table 6-7. Validation results for the PNLSS models with all the nonlinear combinations (left), and without nonlinear combinations with the input (right).
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 351
0.5
0
0.5
1
Am
plit
ude [
V]
Time [s]
RMSE: 44 mV
Figure 6-23. Validation result for the best nonlinear model:measured output (black) and model simulation error (grey).
![Page 188: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/188.jpg)
Chapter 6: Applications of the Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Model
172
0 50 100 150 20060
40
20
0
20Am
plit
ude [
dBV]
Frequency [Hz]
Figure 6-24. DFT spectra of the measured validation output signal (black), linear simulation error (light grey), and nonlinear simulation error (dark grey).
![Page 189: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/189.jpg)
Robot Arm
173
6.5 Robot Arm
6.5.1 Description of the DUT
In this case study, we will model a robot arm (see Figure 6-25) that was constructed by
ir. Thomas Delwiche and his co-workers from the Control Engineering Department of the
Université Libre de Bruxelles (ULB). The goal of his research is to design a controller for the
robot arm such that it can be used for long-distance surgery. The manipulations carried out by
a surgeon with the master robot arm should be repeated accurately by a slave device, and
should give force feedback to the surgeon. T. Delwiche carried out experiments on the device
in cooperation with the Department ELEC of the Vrije Universiteit Brussel. The robot arm
rotates by means of a DC motor that is driven by a servo-amplifier, which incorporates a
controller. The reference voltage sent to the servo-amplifier serves as input of the system.
The input signal is proportional to the couple applied to the arm (1V = 12.95 10-3 Nm). The
output of the system is the angle of the arm, measured with a 1024 counts per turn encoder
connected to the motor shaft (1V 90º). Furthermore, the speed of the arm is fed back
through a controller in order to introduce damping in the system. This feedback loop is
considered as an intrinsic part of the DUT. When we neglect the dynamics of the DC motor
and the nonlinear effects in the set-up, we expect a second order relationship between the
couple applied to the arm, and the resulting angle.
Figure 6-25. Robot arm.
≈
![Page 190: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/190.jpg)
Chapter 6: Applications of the Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Model
174
6.5.2 Description of the Experiments
T. Delwiche performed several multisine experiments on the robot arm, using different RMS
input levels and different bandwidths for the excitation signal. All experiments were
performed at a sampling frequency of 10 MHz/214 = 610.35 Hz. From all the available data,
we selected a set of experiments in which the excitation signal has a bandwidth of 30 Hz and
a RMS value of 80 mV. Ten realizations of a random odd, random phase multisine were
applied to the DUT. Each realization consisted of two periods with 24 415 samples per period.
We use eight of these realizations (a total of 195 320 samples) to estimate the models and
the remaining two realizations (48 830 samples) to validate them.
5 10 15 20 25 30100
80
60
40
20
0
Am
plit
ude [
dB]
Frequency [Hz]
5 10 15 20 25 300
45
90
135
Phase
[º]
Frequency [Hz]
Figure 6-26. BLA of the robot arm (solid black line);Total standard deviation (dashed black line); Measurement noise level (dotted black line);
2nd order linear model (solid grey line); Model error (dashed grey line).
![Page 191: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/191.jpg)
Robot Arm
175
6.5.3 Best Linear Approximation
First, we calculate the BLA with formula (2-30). Since periodic excitations were used and more
than one period per realization was measured, it is possible to distinguish the nonlinear
contributions and the measurement noise. Figure 6-26 shows the estimated BLA of the robot
arm (solid black line). Furthermore, the total standard deviation due to the
combined effect of measurement noise and nonlinear distortions (dashed black line), and the
standard deviation due to the measurement noise (dotted black line) are also plotted.
We see that the total standard deviation lies significantly higher than the measurement noise,
indicating that the nonlinear behaviour is dominant compared with the measurement noise.
Then, a number of linear models are estimated with subspace techniques, followed by a
nonlinear optimization of the cost function (5-101), using only the excited frequency lines.
The best result is achieved by a 3rd order linear model. This model is also plotted in Figure 6-
26 (solid grey line), together with the model error (dashed grey line). Although these models
seem to fit well the nonparametric Best Linear Approximation estimate, they deliver poor
validation results. Hence, a second nonlinear optimization is applied: this time using all the
frequency lines including DC. After this optimization, the 3rd order linear model is validated.
The result is presented in Figure 6-27 which shows the measured output (black) and the
model error (grey). The RMS error of this model is 34.6 mV. This should be compared to the
RMS level of the output which is 218 mV. We will now try to reduce this model error by
estimating a number of nonlinear state space models.
σBLA k( )
σn k( )
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 800.2
0.1
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
Am
plit
ude [
V]
Time [s]
RMSE: 34.6 mV
Figure 6-27. Validation result for the 3rd order linear model:measured output (black) and model simulation error (grey).
![Page 192: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/192.jpg)
Chapter 6: Applications of the Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Model
176
6.5.4 Nonlinear Model
Again, we start by estimating some polynomial nonlinear state space models, using the linear
models obtained in the previous step as starting values. The results are given in Table 6-8.
The second column shows models with a nonlinear state and output equation
( ); the third column shows models that only have a nonlinear state
equation ( , ). The best result is achieved by the 3rd order model of
the second column (13.5 mV).
Furthermore, state affine models of degree 3 and 4 are estimated. The results are
summarized in Table 6-9. An increasing model order improves the RMSE, apart from some
exceptions where the nonlinear optimization probably got stuck into a local minimum.
PNLSSnx=[2 3], ny=[2 3]
PNLSSnx=[2 3], ny=[]
Model Order
ValidationRMSE [mV]
Number of parameters
ValidationRMSE [mV]
Number of parameters
n=2 23.2 53 24.1 37n=3 13.5 127 22.2 97n=4 24.3 259 16.3 209
Table 6-8. Validation results for the polynomial nonlinear state space models.
State Affinedegree 3
State Affinedegree 4
Model Order
ValidationRMSE [mV]
Number of parameters
ValidationRMSE [mV]
Number of parameters
n=2 21.1 23 21.3 32n=3 23.8 39 23.5 55n=4 17.3 59 16.7 84n=5 7.6 83 18.2 119n=6 5.9 111 8.4 160n=7 12.3 143 15.1 207n=8 9.3 179 18.3 260n=9 5.3 219 6.0 319
Table 6-9. Validation results for state affine models of degree 3 and 4.
ζ t( ) η t( ) ξ t( ) 3{ }= =
ζ t( ) ξ t( ) 3{ }= η t( ) 0=
![Page 193: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/193.jpg)
Robot Arm
177
For the robot arm, the state affine approach clearly yields better results than the PNLSS
approach when it comes to minimizing the RMSE. To see this, we compare the best RMSE
achieved on the validation set: 5.3 mV versus 13.5 mV. The validation test of the best
nonlinear model is shown in Figure 6-28. Compared with the linear model, the model error is
reduced with almost a factor 7: from 34.6 mV to 5.3 mV. Although this is a good result, the
smallest validation error is still large compared with the noise level (0.4 mV). This indicates
that there are still unmodelled dynamics in the residuals. Figure 6-29 shows the DFT spectra
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 800.2
0.1
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4Am
plit
ude [
V]
Time [s]
RMSE: 5.3 mV
Figure 6-28. Validation result for the best nonlinear model:measured output (black) and model simulation error (grey).
0 10 20 30 40 5080
60
40
20
0
20
Am
plit
ude [
dBV]
Frequency [Hz]
Figure 6-29. DFT spectra of the measured validation output signal (black), linear simulation error (light grey), and nonlinear simulation error (dark grey).
![Page 194: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/194.jpg)
Chapter 6: Applications of the Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Model
178
of the measured validation output signal (black), the linear simulation error (light grey), and
the nonlinear simulation error (dark grey). The nonlinear model visibly reduces the model
error over a broad spectral range. The remaining errors are concentrated around DC and stem
from the (low frequency) drift problems observed during the measurements.
![Page 195: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/195.jpg)
Wiener-Hammerstein
179
6.6 Wiener-Hammerstein
6.6.1 Description of the DUT
In this section, we will model an electronic circuit with a Wiener-Hammerstein structure,
designed by Gerd Vandersteen [82] from the Vrije Universiteit Brussel, Department ELEC. The
system is composed of a static nonlinear block, sandwiched between two linear dynamic
systems.
The first linear system is a 3rd order Chebyshev low-pass filter with a 0.5 dB ripple and a pass
band up to 4.4 kHz. The static nonlinearity is realized by resistors and a diode. The second
linear system is a 3rd order inverse Chebyshev low-pass filter with a -40 dB stop band,
starting at 5 kHz.
6.6.2 Description of the Experiments
The excitation signal consists of two parts: four periods of a random odd, random phase
multisine with 16 384 samples per period, and about 170 000 data points of filtered Gaussian
noise. Both signals have a bandwidth of 10 kHz and a RMS value of about 640 mV. The
multisine will be utilized for the estimation procedure, and the Gaussian noise for validation
purposes. We performed the measurements at a sampling frequency of 51.2 kHz.
6.6.3 Level of Nonlinear Distortions
First, we will analyse the level of nonlinear distortions from the multisine experiment. In
Figure 6-31, the spectrum of the averaged output is shown. The solid black line represents
the output at the excited lines. The grey circles and crosses denote the contributions at the
odd and even detection lines, respectively. In order to improve the visibility of the figure, the
y0u0
f f
Figure 6-30. Wiener-Hammerstein system.
u y
![Page 196: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/196.jpg)
Chapter 6: Applications of the Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Model
180
number of plotted contributions on the detection lines is reduced. From Figure 6-31, it is clear
that the nonlinear distortions lie in the pass band about 20 dB below the linear contributions.
Furthermore, the even nonlinear distortions slightly dominate the odd nonlinear contributions.
The standard deviation on the excited lines, which is a measure for the measurement noise, is
also plotted (dashed black line). We see that in the pass band, the noise level is about 30 dB
lower than the nonlinear distortion level.
6.6.4 Best Linear Approximation
We now calculate using the multisine data set. Since several periods were
measured, the variance due to the measurement noise is estimated using formula (2-
17). To calculate the total variance (i.e., the effect of the nonlinear distortions and
the measurement noise), we cannot use equation (2-21), because only one multisine
realization was applied. However, the level of nonlinear distortions at the non excited
harmonic lines can be interpolated to the excited frequency lines. This allows to calculate the
total variance on the BLA. The BLA is plotted in Figure 6-32 (solid black line), together with
the standard deviation due to the measurement noise (dotted black line), and the total
standard deviation (dashed black line).
0 2 4 6 8 1060
40
20
0
20
40
60
Frequency [kHz]
Am
plit
ude [
dB]
Figure 6-31. Averaged output spectrumExcited lines (solid black line), Standard deviation (dashed black line)
Odd nonlinear distortion (grey circles), Even nonlinear distortion (grey crosses).
GBLA jωk( )
σn2 k( )
σBLA2 k( )
σn k( )
σBLA k( )
![Page 197: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/197.jpg)
Wiener-Hammerstein
181
0 2 4 6 8 10
100
80
60
40
20
0
Am
plit
ude [
dB]
Frequency [kHz]
0 2 4 6 8 10
720
540
360
180
0
Phase
[º]
Frequency [kHz]
Figure 6-32. BLA of the Wiener-Hammerstein circuit (solid black line);Total standard deviation (dashed black line); Measurement noise level (dotted black line);
6th order linear model (solid grey line); Model error (dashed grey line).
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 31
0.5
0
0.5
Am
plit
ude [
V]
Time [s]
RMSE: 36.2 mV
Figure 6-33. Validation result for the 6th order linear model:measured output (black) and model simulation error (grey).
![Page 198: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/198.jpg)
Chapter 6: Applications of the Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Model
182
Linear models of various orders are estimated. For this, a subspace technique is used which is
followed by a numeric optimization, both carried out in the frequency domain. The 6th order
linear model yields the best result and is shown in Figure 6-32 (solid grey line), together with
the model error (dashed grey line). Next, the 6th order linear model is validated using the
Gaussian noise sequence. In Figure 6-33, the simulation error (grey) is plotted together with
the measured output (black). The RMSE is quite high compared to the RMS level of the
output: 36.2 mV versus 213 mV. Note also that the asymmetric behaviour of the model error
is in agreement with the dominant even nonlinear behaviour of the system.
6.6.5 Nonlinear Model
The linear models obtained in the previous section are now used as starting values to
estimate a number of polynomial nonlinear state space models. We estimate models of 4th,
5th, and 6th order. Two kinds of models are discussed: models that use all the nonlinear
combinations of the states and the input ( , “full”), and models that use the nonlinear
combinations of the states only ( , “states only”). We also verify whether the use of a
linear or nonlinear output equation influences the results. Table 6-10 shows the modelling
results for the “full” PNLSS models.
In Table 6-11, the validation results are shown for models that do not use the input in the
nonlinear combinations. Since there are less nonlinear terms in these models, the number of
required parameters is significantly lower. However, the RMSE values are always higher than
the corresponding entries in Table 6-10. When taking a closer look at Table 6-10, we observe
that the models with a linear output equation ( , on the right side of the table)
always yield better results than the models with a nonlinear output equation. The best PNLSS
PNLSS, “full”nx=[2 3], ny=[2 3]
PNLSS, “full”nx=[2 3], ny=[]
Model Order
ValidationRMSE [mV]
Number of parameters
ValidationRMSE [mV]
Number of parameters
n=4 9.60 259 8.33 209n=5 3.70 473 3.61 396n=6 3.32 797 3.21 685
Table 6-10. Validation results for the “full” PNLSS models.
ξ t( ) 3{ }x t( ) 3{ }
η t( ) 0=
![Page 199: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/199.jpg)
Wiener-Hammerstein
183
model is the 6th order model with a linear output equation that uses all the nonlinear
combinations of the states up to degree [2 3]. It has a validation RMSE of 3.21 mV.
Next, we estimate state affine models of various orders and of degree 3 and 4. Looking at
Table 6-12, which shows the validation RMSE for the state affine approach, we observe a
similar trend as with the robot arm data: the RMSE diminishes smoothly as the model order
increases.
The best validation result is achieved by the 10th order model of degree 4, with a RMSE of
2.6 mV. The simulation error of this model is plotted in Figure 6-34 (grey), together with the
measured output signal (black).
PNLSS, “states only”nx=[2 3], ny=[2 3]
PNLSS, “states only”nx=[2 3], ny=[]
Model Order
ValidationRMSE [mV]
Number of parameters
ValidationRMSE [mV]
Number of parameters
n=4 12.0 159 12.18 129n=5 4.18 311 3.94 261n=6 3.65 552 3.23 475
Table 6-11. Validation results for the “states only” PNLSS.
State Affinedegree 3
State Affinedegree 4
Model Order
ValidationRMSE [mV]
Number of parameters
ValidationRMSE [mV]
Number of parameters
n=5 7.35 83 6.98 119n=6 5.10 111 4.64 160n=7 4.41 143 3.82 207n=8 3.86 179 3.13 260n=9 3.66 219 3.01 319n=10 3.56 263 2.60 384
Table 6-12. Validation results for state affine models of degree 3 and 4.
![Page 200: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/200.jpg)
Chapter 6: Applications of the Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Model
184
Figure 6-35 shows the spectra of the measured validation output signal (black), the linear
simulation error (light grey), and the nonlinear simulation error (dark grey). In the pass-band
of the device, the nonlinear model pushes down the model error with about 20 dB. Beyond
5 kHz, no significant difference between the linear and the nonlinear model error can be
observed.
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 31
0.5
0
0.5
Am
plit
ude [
V]
Time [s]
RMSE: 2.6 mV
Figure 6-34. Validation result for the best nonlinear model:measured output (black) and model simulation error (grey).
0 5 10 15 20 25100
80
60
40
20
0
Am
plit
ude [
dBV]
Frequency [kHz]
Figure 6-35. DFT spectra of the measured validation output signal (black), linear simulation error (light grey), and nonlinear simulation error (dark grey).
![Page 201: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/201.jpg)
Wiener-Hammerstein
185
6.6.6 Comparison with a Block-oriented Approach
In [68], the same measurements were used to model this electronic circuit using a block-
oriented approach. Both linear blocks of the Wiener-Hammerstein model were identified as a
6th order linear model. The static nonlinearity was parametrized as a 9th degree polynomial.
Taking into account two exchangeable gains between the three blocks, this results in a total of
34 parameters. Furthermore, the RMS value of the simulation error for this model is 3.8 mV.
Hence, we see that this error is reduced with more than 30% to 2.6 mV using the PNLSS/
state affine approach, at the cost of a significantly higher number of parameters.
![Page 202: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/202.jpg)
Chapter 6: Applications of the Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Model
186
6.7 Crystal Detector
6.7.1 Description of the DUT
The last modelling challenge discussed in this chapter is an Agilent-HP420C crystal detector
(see Figure 6-36). This kind of device is often used in microwave applications to measure the
envelope of a signal. The RF connection of the crystal detector (the left part in Figure 6-36)
serves as input of the DUT. The video connection of the detector (right part) is considered as
output of the system. From the physical, block-oriented model proposed in [63], we expect to
find a second order relationship between the input and output of this device.
6.7.2 Description of the Experiments
Ir. Liesbeth Gommé from the ELEC Department at the Vrije Universiteit Brussel carried out the
experiments with the crystal detector. She applied two filtered Gaussian noise sequences of
50 000 samples with a growing RMS value as a function of time. Both signals are
superimposed on a DC level of 117 mV, and have a total RMS value of 118 mV. The input
Agilent 423B
Figure 6-36. Agilent-HP crystal detector.
0 1 2 3 4
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2(a) Estimation data set
Am
plit
ude [
V]
Time [ms]0 1 2 3 4
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2(b) Validation data set
Time [ms]
Figure 6-37. Estimation and validation input sequences.
![Page 203: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/203.jpg)
Crystal Detector
187
signal of the first data set had a bandwidth of 800 kHz and will be used for estimation
purposes (Figure 6-37 (a)). The second data set had a bandwidth of 400 kHz and will serve as
validation data set (Figure 6-37 (b)). The sampling frequency used in the experiments was
10 MHz. Each sequence was repeated and measured 5 times. This allows to average the data
and to compute the standard deviation of the noise on the measurements (0.23 mV at the
input, and 0.24 mV at the output of the system).
6.7.3 Best Linear Approximation
To calculate the BLA, we first average the 5 measured periods of the estimation data set in
order to diminish the measurement noise. We then split the data in subblocks of
5000 samples. With equations (2-25) and (2-27), we calculate the estimated BLA together
fs
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 90050
40
30
20
10
0
10
Am
plit
ude [
dB]
Frequency [kHz]
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900
45
30
15
0
Phase
[º]
Frequency [kHz]
Figure 6-38. BLA of the crystal detector (solid black line);Total standard deviation (dashed black line);
3rd order linear model (solid grey line); Model error (dashed grey line).
M 10=
![Page 204: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/204.jpg)
Chapter 6: Applications of the Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Model
188
with its covariance . In Figure 6-38, (solid black line) and the total
standard deviation (dashed black line) are plotted. Next, a number of linear models
is estimated using frequency domain subspace identification, followed by a nonlinear
optimization. In Figure 6-38, the third order linear model that was obtained is plotted (solid
grey line), together with the model error (dashed grey line). Next, this linear model is
validated; the result is shown in Figure 6-39. The black line denotes the measured output
signal; the grey line represents the model error. The RMSE of the linear model is 0.89 mV. The
RMS value of the output sequence, without the DC offset, is 15 mV. In the next step, we will
try to reduce the model error using a nonlinear model.
6.7.4 Nonlinear Model
We start by estimating some polynomial nonlinear state space models. We check whether a
linear or a nonlinear output equation needs to be utilized, and whether the input needs to be
included in the nonlinear combinations. Table 6-13 shows the modelling results when all
nonlinear combinations of the states and the input are used (“full” PNLSS, using ).
The left and right column show the results for a nonlinear and linear output equation,
respectively.
σBLA2 k( ) GBLA jωk( )
σBLA k( )
0 1 2 3 4
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2Am
plit
ude [
V]
Time [ms]
RMSE: 0.89 mV
Figure 6-39. Validation result for the 3rd order linear model:measured output (black) and model simulation error (grey).
ξ t( ) 3{ }
![Page 205: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/205.jpg)
Crystal Detector
189
Next, we estimate polynomial nonlinear state space models that only use nonlinear
combinations of the states (“states only” PNLSS, using ). The validation results for
these models are summarized in Table 6-14.
Obviously, the best model structure is the one in the left column of Table 6-13. These models
have a nonlinear state and output equation, and use all nonlinear combinations of the states
and the input. The best PNLSS model is the 4th order model in the left column of Table 6-13,
with a RMSE of 0.260 mV. Taking into account the input and output noise levels on the
averaged data (around 0.23 mV), this is a satisfying result.
Next, we try the state affine approach. The results for state affine models of degree 3 and 4
are shown in Table 6-15. The results here are even better than for the polynomial nonlinear
state space approach: lower validation RMSEs are obtained for a lower number of parameters.
These excellent results seem to contradict the poor performance of the state affine approach
in the Silverbox case study. Both the Silverbox and the crystal detector have been identified as
Nonlinear Feedback systems. Hence, we would expect a similar modelling performance.
However, there is an important difference between both systems: the crystal detector shows a
significantly lower amount of dynamics between its input and output compared to the
PNLSS, “full”nx=[2 3], ny=[2 3]
PNLSS, “full”nx=[2 3], ny=[]
Model Order
ValidationRMSE [mV]
Number of parameters
ValidationRMSE [mV]
Number of parameters
n=3 0.267 127 0.780 97n=4 0.260 259 0.308 209n=5 0.367 473 0.555 396
Table 6-13. Validation results for the “full” PNLSS models.
PNLSS, “states only”nx=[2 3], ny=[2 3]
PNLSS, “states only”nx=[2 3], ny=[]
Model Order
ValidationRMSE [mV]
Number of parameters
ValidationRMSE [mV]
Number of parameters
n=3 0.580 71 0.743 55n=4 0.277 159 0.397 129n=5 0.876 311 0.440 261
Table 6-14. Validation results for the “states only” PNLSS models.
x t( ) 3{ }
![Page 206: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/206.jpg)
Chapter 6: Applications of the Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Model
190
Silverbox (Figure 6-3 versus Figure 6-38). Consequently, there is a high resemblance between
the input and output signals for the crystal detector. Therefore, the fact that the nonlinear
behaviour is mainly present at the output poses less difficulties for the state affine approach
(for which the approximation relies on polynomials of the input).
The best result obtained with the state affine approach is the 4th order model of degree 3
with a validation RMSE of 0.259 mV. This model was used to generate Figure 6-40, which
shows the measured validation output signal (black) and the simulation error of the best
nonlinear model.
State Affinedegree 3
State Affinedegree 4
Model Order
ValidationRMSE [mV]
Number of parameters
ValidationRMSE [mV]
Number of parameters
n=3 0.275 39 0.266 55n=4 0.259 59 0.260 84n=5 0.264 83 0.261 119n=6 0.262 111 0.271 160n=7 0.278 143 0.266 207n=8 0.264 179 0.264 260
Table 6-15. Validation results for state affine models of degree 3 and 4.
0 1 2 3 4
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
Am
plit
ude [
V]
Time [ms]
RMSE: 0.259 mV
Figure 6-40. Validation result for the best nonlinear model:measured output (black) and model simulation error (grey).
![Page 207: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/207.jpg)
Crystal Detector
191
In Figure 6-41, the model errors for the best linear and best nonlinear model are plotted. The
residuals of the linear model mainly consist of a DC offset and large asymmetric spikes at the
end of the sequence, which are not present in the nonlinear model error. Both phenomena
indicate that an even nonlinear behaviour is present in the DUT. This is consistent with the
practical use of the DUT: a squaring characteristic is required for AM-demodulation.
Furthermore, Figure 6-42 shows the DFT of the measured validation output (black), the linear
0 1 2 3 48
6
4
2
0
2
Am
plit
ude [
mV]
Time [ms]
Figure 6-41. Simulation error in the validation test for the best linear (light grey),and best nonlinear (dark grey) model.
0 1 2 3 4 580
60
40
20
Am
plit
ude [
dB]
Frequency [MHz]
Figure 6-42. DFT spectra of the measured validation output signal (black), linear simulation error (light grey), and nonlinear simulation error (dark grey).
![Page 208: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/208.jpg)
Chapter 6: Applications of the Polynomial Nonlinear State Space Model
192
(light grey) and the nonlinear (dark grey) simulation error. From this plot, we observe that the
nonlinear model reduces the model error in the frequency band between DC and 1 MHz.
6.7.5 Comparison with a Block-oriented Approach
From the analysis of its internal structure, it became clear that the crystal detector can be
represented by a Nonlinear Feedback model. Hence, a block-oriented Nonlinear Feedback
model was estimated for this device in [63], using the same measured data. Contrary to the
Nonlinear Feedback model from Chapter 4, the approach in [63] allows a nonlinearity in the
feedback branch that is dynamic. This nonlinearity takes the form of a Wiener-Hammerstein
structure (see Figure 5-7). In order to separate the feedforward and feedback dynamics
during the estimation, an excitation signal with a linearly increasing amplitude as a function of
time is required. The feedforward branch of the block-oriented model was identified as a 1st
order linear system. The Wiener-Hammerstein structure in the feedback branch consisted of a
1st order linear system, followed by a static nonlinearity that was parametrized as a 9th
degree polynomial. The second linear system was a simple gain factor. Taking into account the
exchangeability of gain factors between the different blocks, the total number of parameters
of the block-oriented model is 13. Furthermore, the simulation error achieved in the validation
test was 0.30 mV. Hence, the PNLSS and the state affine approach perform better, at the price
of a considerably higher number of parameters. Furthermore, the added value of a block-
oriented approach is illustrated in [28]: in this paper, the block-oriented model which is
estimated in the base band is used to predict its behaviour in the RF-band.
![Page 209: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/209.jpg)
193
CHAPTER 7
CONCLUSIONS
![Page 210: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/210.jpg)
Chapter 7: Conclusions
194
The main goal of this thesis was to study and to model the behaviour of nonlinear systems,
using the Best Linear Approximation and multisine excitation signals. These intermediate tools
were successfully applied for the qualification and quantification of DSP non-idealities. This
was demonstrated in Chapter 3 with some practical examples, including finite word length
effects in digital filtering, and the coding/decoding process of an audio compression codec.
The main advantage of the presented method resides in its simplicity and its general
applicability: no elaborated, deep theoretical analysis is required and the method can be
applied regardless of the functionality of the DSP algorithm.
Chapter 4 has revealed yet another example of how the Best Linear Approximation can be
adopted in the identification of block-oriented models. A straightforward identification
procedure was presented to identify a specific class of Nonlinear Feedback models. It was
successfully applied to real measurements from a physical device.
In Chapter 5, we have shown that when a general, black box model of a nonlinear device is
required, the PNLSS model is a perfect tool to achieve this goal. First, we have illustrated the
extreme flexibility of this model by proving an explicit link with several popular block-oriented
models. In addition, some examples of non-Fading Memory systems were shown to have a
PNLSS representation. Secondly, the ability to cope with multivariable systems is included in a
very natural way. If the user is not interested in physical interpretation of the model
parameters, then block-oriented models can be considered obsolete: the PNLSS model
encompasses them all, at the price of a higher number of parameters. Furthermore, the
PNLSS identification procedure is straightforward, and consists of only three simple steps: (1)
compute the Best Linear Approximation, (2) estimate a linear model, and (3) solve a standard
nonlinear optimization problem. The seven successful practical applications from Chapter 6
confirm the flexibility of the PNLSS model. They demonstrate that the identification procedure
works very well in practice, and is robust on both small (e.g. combine harvester) and large
(e.g. quarter car set-up) data sets. In each of the test cases, a significant model error
reduction was achieved compared with the linear models. One of the main advantages of the
PNLSS approach is that no difficult identification settings have to be chosen by the user during
the identification, such as the number of input and output time lags, the number of neurons,
or the hyperparameters values. An estimate of the model order is determined easily from the
BLA in step (2). Although it is possible to improve the model by tweaking the nonlinear state
and output equations, the standard full PNLSS model usually delivers satisfying results with a
moderate nonlinear degree.
![Page 211: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/211.jpg)
195
Naturally, there are limitations to the proposed approach. First of all, the PNLSS model is only
suitable to handle low order systems (as a rule of thumb: ). For higher order systems,
the combinatorial explosion of the number of parameters becomes too restrictive in order to
get good modelling results. This problem can be overcome, for instance by restricting the
number of states included in the polynomial expansion, or by imposing a linear relation for a
part of the states. The second disadvantage resides in the nonlinear search during the
estimation of the model parameters: the risk of getting trapped in a local minimum is always
imminent. However, it must be said that this weak spot is common to many identification
methods, even in the case of linear modelling. Finally, it is difficult to guarantee the stability of
the estimated models. But again, the risk of instability is inherent to any recursive model.
Sometimes it is possible to add constraints in order to keep the model stable, but this may
have a negative influence on the modelling performance. These three limitations constitute
interesting topics for future research.
We conclude that the common denominator in this thesis, is the KISS principle [87]: Keep it
Simple and Stupid, or rather, Successful. The user is not interested in overwhelming and
complicated mathematical models, or sophisticated identification procedures. He/she does not
want to go astray in many identification options that are difficult to understand. Hence, one of
the main contributions of this thesis is the PNLSS approach: a simple but robust tool, that can
be used to model a broad class of nonlinear systems. To put the KISS concept into action, we
recommend the following work flow:
1. Excite the DUT with a broadband excitation signal that corresponds to normal
operating conditions (bandwidth and RMS value). Preferably, apply several realizations
of a random phase multisine, with two periods per realization.
2. Use the input/output measurements to calculate the BLA as explained in Chapter 2.
3. Estimate a linear model from the BLA and its measured covariance. Select the linear
model with the lowest order, for which there are no significant systematic model
errors.
4. Estimate the standard (full) PNLSS model with a nonlinear degree [2 3] in both the
state and the output equation, and the model order determined in the previous step.
Use in this estimation step all but one multisine. The remaining multisine is then used
for the validation.
na 10<
![Page 212: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/212.jpg)
Chapter 7: Conclusions
196
![Page 213: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/213.jpg)
197
REFERENCES
[1] E. W. Bai. An optimal two-stage identification algorithm for Hammerstein-Wiener
nonlinear systems. Automatica, vol. 34, no. 3, pp. 333-338, 1998.
[2] E. W. Bai. Frequency domain identification of Wiener models. Automatica, vol. 39, no. 9,
pp. 1521-1530, 2003.
[3] E. W. Bai. Frequency domain identification of Hammerstein models. IEEE Transactions
on Automatic Control, vol. 48, no. 4, pp. 530-542, 2003.
[4] P. Banelli. Theoretical analysis and performance of OFDM signals in nonlinear fading
channels. IEEE Transactions on Wireless Communications, vol. 2, no. 2, pp. 284-293,
2003.
[5] S. Boyd, L. Chua. Fading Memory and the Problem of Approximating Nonlinear
Operators with Volterra Series. IEEE Transactions on Circuits and Systems, vol. 32,
no. 11, pp. 1150-1161, 1985.
[6] D. K. Campbell. Nonlinear Science from Paradigms to Practicalities. From cardinals to
chaos: reflections on the life and legacy of Stanislaw Ulam. Necia Grant Cooper,
Cambridge University Press, pp. 218, 1989.
[7] S. Chen, S. A. Billings. Representations of non-linear systems: the NARMAX model. Int.
Journal of Control, vol. 49, no. 3, pp. 1013-1032, 1989.
[8] L. Chua, T. Lin. Chaos in Digital Filters. IEEE Transactions on Circuits and Systems,
vol. 35, no. 6, pp. 648-658, 1988.
[9] T. Coen, J. Paduart, J. Anthonis, J. Schoukens, J. De Baerdemaeker. Nonlinear system
identification on a combine harvester. Proceedings of the American Control Conference,
Minneapolis, Minnesota, USA, pp. 3074-3079, 2006.
[10] R. G. Corlis, R. Luus. Use of residuals in the identification and control of two-input,
single-output systems. I&EC Fundamentals, vol. 8, no. 5, pp. 246-253, 1969.
[11] P. Crama. Identification of block-oriented nonlinear models. PhD Thesis, Vrije
Universiteit Brussel, 2004.
[12] R. Crochiere, L. R. Rabiner. Multirate Digital Signal Processing. Prentice-Hall, Englewood
Cliffs, New Jersey, 1983.
![Page 214: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/214.jpg)
198
[13] R. Dinis, A. Palhau. A class of signal-processing schemes for reducing the envelope
fluctuations of CDMA signals. IEEE Transactions on Communications, vol. 53, no. 5,
pp. 882-889, 2005.
[14] T. D’haene, R. Pintelon, P. Guillaume. Stable Approximations of Unstable Models.
Proceedings of the IEEE Instrumentation and Measurement Technology Conference,
Warsaw, Poland, pp. 1-6, 1-3 May 2007.
[15] T. D’haene, R. Pintelon, J. Schoukens, E. Van Gheem. Variance analysis of frequency
response function measurements using periodic excitations. IEEE Transactions on
Instrumentation and Measurement, vol. 54, no. 4, pp. 1452-1456, 2005.
[16] J. Dieudonné. Foundations of Modern Analysis. Academic Press, New York, 1960.
[17] T. Dobrowiecki, J. Schoukens. Measuring a linear approximation to weakly nonlinear
MIMO systems. Automatica, vol. 43, no. 10, pp. 1737-1751, 2007.
[18] T. Dobrowiecki, J. Schoukens, P. Guillaume. Optimized Excitation Signals for MIMO
Frequency Response Function Measurements. IEEE Transactions on Instrumentation
and Measurement, vol. 55, no. 6, pp. 2072-2097, 2006.
[19] M. Enqvist. Linear Models of Nonlinear Systems. PhD Thesis, Linköping Studies in
Science and Technology, Dissertation no. 985, 2005.
[20] M. Enqvist, J. Schoukens, R. Pintelon. Detection of Unmodeled Nonlinearities Using
Correlation Methods. Proceedings of the IEEE Instrumentation and Measurement
Technology Conference, Warsaw, Poland, pp. 1-6, 1-3 May 2007.
[21] M. Enqvist, L. Ljung. Linear approximations of nonlinear FIR systems for separable input
processes. Automatica, vol. 41, no. 3, pp. 459-473, 2005.
[22] M. Espinoza, K. Pelckmans, L. Hoegaerts, J. Suykens, B. De Moor. A comparative study
of LS-SVMs applied to the silver box identification problem. Proceedings of the IFAC
Symposium on Nonlinear Control Systems, Stuttgart, Germany, pp. 513-518, 1-3
September 2004.
[23] M. Espinoza. Structured Kernel Based Modeling and its Application to Electric Load
Forecasting. Department of Electrical Engineering, KULeuven, 2006.
[24] P. Eykhoff. System Identification. Parameter and State Estimation. Wiley, New York,
1974.
[25] R. Fletcher. Practical Methods of Optimization (Second Edition). Wiley, New York, 1991.
![Page 215: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/215.jpg)
199
[26] M. Fliess, D. Normand-Cyrot. On the approximation of nonlinear systems by some
simple state-space models. Proceedings of the IFAC Identification and Parameter
Estimation Conference, Washington DC, USA, vol. 1, pp. 511-514, 7-11 June 1982.
[27] G. H. Golub, C. F. Van Loan. Matrix Computations - Third Edition. The John Hopkins
University Press, London, 1996.
[28] L. Gommé, J. Schoukens, Y. Rolain, W. Van Moer. Validation of a crystal detector model
for the calibration of the Large Signal Network Analyzer. Proceedings of the
Instrumentation and Measurement Technology Conference, Warsaw, Poland, pp. 1-6, 1-
3 May 2007.
[29] H. Hjalmarsson, J. Schoukens. On direct identification of physical parameters in non-
linear models. Proceedings of the IFAC Symposium on Nonlinear Control Systems,
Stuttgart, Germany, pp. 519-524, 1-3 September 2004.
[30] I. W. Hunter, M. J. Korenberg. The Identification of Nonlinear Biological Systems Wiener
and Hammerstein Cascade Models. Biological Cybernetics, vol. 55, no. 2-3, pp. 135-144,
1986.
[31] N. Jayant, J. Johnston, R. Safranek. Signal compression based on models of human
perception. Proceedings of the IEEE, vol. 81, no. 10, pp. 1385-1422, 1993.
[32] Z. P. Jiang, Y. Wang. Input-to-state stability for discrete-time nonlinear systems.
Automatica, vol. 37, no. 6, pp. 857-869, 2001.
[33] H. K. Khalil. Nonlinear Systems. Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, New Jersey, Second
Edition, 1996.
[34] D. E. Knuth. The Art of Computer Programming Vol. I. Addison-Wesley, pp. 70, 1968.
[35] Kreider, Kuller, Ostberg, Perkins. An Introduction to Linear Analysis. Addison-Wesley
Publishing Company Inc, 1966.
[36] K. Levenberg. A method for the solution of certain problems in least squares. Quart.
Appl. Math., vol. 2, pp. 164-168, 1944.
[37] I. J. Leontaritis, S. A. Billings. Input-output parametric models for non-linear systems.
Part I: deterministic non-linear systems. International Journal of Control, vol. 41, no. 2,
pp. 303-344, 1985.
[38] L. Ljung. System Identification: Theory for the User. Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River,
New Jersey, Second Edition, 1999.
![Page 216: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/216.jpg)
200
[39] L. Ljung, Q. Zhang, P. Lindskog, A. Juditski. Modeling a non-linear electric circuit with
black box and grey box models. Proceedings of the IFAC Symposium on Nonlinear
Control Systems, Stuttgart, Germany, pp. 543-548, 1-3 September 2004.
[40] E. N. Lorenz. Deterministic Nonperiodic Flow. Journal of the Atmospheric Sciences,
vol. 20, no. 2, pp. 130-141, 1963.
[41] O. Markusson. Model and System Inversion with Applications in Nonlinear System
Identification and Control. S3-Automatic Control, Royal Institute of Technology, 2002.
[42] D. Marquardt. An algorithm for least-squares estimation of nonlinear parameters. SIAM
Journal of Applied Mathematics, vol. 11, pp. 431-441, 1963.
[43] V. J. Mathews, G. L. Sicuranza. Polynomial Signal Processing. A Wiley-Interscience
Publication, 2000.
[44] T. McKelvey, H. Akçay, L. Ljung. Subspace-based multivariable system identification from
frequency response data. IEEE Transactions on Automatic Control, vol. 41, no. 7,
pp. 960-979, 1996.
[45] T. McKelvey, A. Helmersson, T. Ribarits. Data driven Local Coordinates for multivariable
linear systems and their application to system identification. Automatica, vol. 40, no. 9,
pp. 1629-1635, 2004.
[46] R. R. Mohler, W. D. Kolodziej. An overview of bilinear system theory and applications.
IEEE Transactions on Systems, Man and Cybernetics, vol. 10, no. 10, pp. 683-688,
1980.
[47] S. Narendra Kumpati, K. Parthasarathy. Identification and control of dynamical systems
using neural networks. IEEE Transactions on Neural Networks, vol. 1, no. 1, pp. 4-27,
1990.
[48] J. G. Németh. Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Interpolated Volterra Models.
PhD Thesis, Vrije Universiteit Brussel, 2003.
[49] S. J. Norquay, A. Palazoglu, J. Romagnoli. Application of Wiener Model Predictive Control
to a pH Neutralization Experiment. IEEE Transactions on Control Systems Technology,
vol. 7, no. 4, pp. 437-445, 1999.
[50] A. V. Oppenheim, R. W. Schafer. Discrete-Time Signal Processing. Prentice-Hall, pp. 335-
373 and pp. 296, 1989.
[51] M. J. L. Orr. Radial Basis Function Networks Toolbox.
http://www.anc.ed.ac.uk/rbf/rbf.html, 1999.
![Page 217: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/217.jpg)
201
[52] J. Paduart, G. Horvath, J. Schoukens. Fast identification of systems with nonlinear
feedback. Proceedings of the IFAC Symposium on Nonlinear Control Systems, Stuttgart,
Germany, pp. 525-530, 1-3 September 2004.
[53] R. Pintelon. Frequency-domain subspace system identification using non-parametric
noise models. Automatica, vol. 38, no. 8, pp. 1295-1311, 2002.
[54] R. Pintelon, Y. Rolain, W. Van Moer. Probability density function for frequency response
function measurements using periodic signals. IEEE Transactions on Instrumentation
and Measurement, vol. 52, no. 1, pp. 61-68, 2003.
[55] R. Pintelon, J. Schoukens. Measurement of frequency response functions using periodic
excitations, corrupted by correlated input/output errors. IEEE Transactions on
Instrumentation and Measurement, vol. 50, no. 6, pp. 1753–1760, 2001.
[56] R. Pintelon, J. Schoukens. System Identification. A Frequency domain approach. IEEE
Press, New Jersey, 2001.
[57] R. Pintelon, G. Vandersteen, L. De Locht, Y. Rolain, J. Schoukens. Experimental
Characterization of Operational Amplifiers: a System Identification Approach. IEEE
Transactions on Instrumentation and Measurement, vol. 53, no. 3, pp. 854- 876, 2004.
[58] S. Prakriya, D. Hatzinakos. Blind Identification of LTI-ZMNL-LTI Nonlinear Channel
Models. IEEE Transactions on Signal Processing, vol. 43, no. 12, pp. 3007-3013, 1995.
[59] W. J. Rugh. Nonlinear System Theory, The Volterra/Wiener Approach. The John Hopkins
University Press, 1981.
[60] M. Schetzen. The Volterra and Wiener Theories of Nonlinear Systems. Wiley, New York,
1980.
[61] J. Schoukens. Parameterestimatie in Lineaire en Niet-Lineaire Systemen met Behulp van
Digitale Tijdsdomein Metingen. PhD Thesis, Vrije Universiteit Brussel, 1985.
[62] J. Schoukens, T. Dobrowiecki, R. Pintelon. Identification of linear systems in the
presence of nonlinear distortions. A frequency domain approach. IEEE Transactions on
Automatic Control, vol. 43, no. 2, pp. 176-190, 1998.
[63] J. Schoukens, L. Gommé, W. Van Moer, Y. Rolain. Identification of a crystal detector
using a block structured nonlinear feedback model. Proceedings of the Instrumentation
and Measurement Technology Conference, Warsaw, Poland, pp. 1-6, 1-3 May 2007.
[64] J. Schoukens, R. Pintelon, T. Dobrowiecki, Y. Rolain. Identification of linear systems with
nonlinear distortions. Automatica, vol. 41, no. 3, pp. 491-504, 2005.
![Page 218: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/218.jpg)
202
[65] J. Schoukens, Y. Rolain, R. Pintelon. Analysis of windowing/leakage effects in frequency
response function measurements. Automatica, vol. 42, no. 1, pp. 27-38, 2006.
[66] J. Schoukens, J. Swevers, R. Pintelon, H. Van der Auweraer. Excitation design for FRF
measurements in the presence of nonlinear distortions. Proceedings of the ISMA2002
Conference, Leuven, Belgium, vol. 2, pp. 951-958, 16-18 September 2002.
[67] J. Schoukens, G. Nemeth, P. Crama, Y. Rolain, R. Pintelon. Fast approximate
identification of nonlinear systems. Automatica, vol. 39, no. 7, pp. 1267-1274, 2003.
[68] J. Schoukens, R. Pintelon, J. Paduart, G. Vandersteen. Nonparametric Initial Estimates
for Wiener-Hammerstein Systems. Proceedings of the 14th IFAC Symposium on System
Identification, Newcastle, Australia, pp. 778-783, 29-31 March 2006.
[69] A. Schrempf. Identification of Extended State-Affine Systems. PhD Thesis, Johannes
Kepler Universität, 2004.
[70] J. Sjöberg, Q. Zhang, L. Ljung, A. Benveniste, B. Delyon, P.-Y. Glorennec, H.
Hjalmarsson, A. Juditsky. Nonlinear black-box modeling in system identification: a
unified overview. Automatica, vol. 31, no. 12, pp. 1691-1724, 1995.
[71] J. Sjöberg. On estimation of nonlinear black box models: How to obtain a good
initialization. Proceedings of the 1997 IEEE Workshop Neural Networks for Signal
Processing VII, Amelia Island Plantation, Florida, pp. 72-81, 1997.
[72] K. Smolders, M. Witters, J. Swevers, P. Sas. Identification of a Nonlinear State Space
Model for Control using a Feature Space Transformation. Proceedings of the ISMA2006
Conference, Leuven, Belgium, pp. 3331-3342, 18-20 September 2006.
[73] E. D. Sontag. Realization theory of discrete-time nonlinear systems: Part I: The
bounded case. IEEE Transactions on Circuits and Systems, vol. 26, no. 5, pp. 342-356,
1979.
[74] E. D. Sontag. Smooth stabilization implies coprime factorization. IEEE Transactions on
Automatic Control, vol. 34, no. 4, pp. 435-443, 1989.
[75] T. Söderström, P. Stoica. System Identification. Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, 1989.
[76] L. Sragner, J. Schoukens, G. Horvath. Modeling of slightly nonlinear systems: a neural
network approach. Proceedings of the IFAC Symposium on Nonlinear Control Systems,
Stuttgart, Germany, pp. 531-536, 1-3 September 2004.
![Page 219: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/219.jpg)
203
[77] J. A. K. Suykens, B. De Moor, J. Vandewalle. Nonlinear System Identification using
neural state space models, applicable to robust control design. International Journal of
Control, vol. 62, no. 1, pp.129-152, 1995.
[78] J. A. K. Suykens, J. Vandewalle, B. De Moor. Artificial Neural Networks for Modelling and
Control of Non-Linear Systems. and their application to control. Kluwer Academic
Publishers, 1996.
[79] H. Unbehauen, G. P. Rao. A review of identification in continuous-time systems. Annual
Reviews in Control, vol. 22, pp. 145-171, 1998.
[80] V. Verdult. Nonlinear System Identification: A State-Space approach. PhD Thesis,
University of Twente, 2002.
[81] V. Verdult. Identification of local linear state-space models: the silver-box case study.
Proceedings of the IFAC Symposium on Nonlinear Control Systems, Stuttgart, Germany,
pp. 537-542, 1-3 September 2004.
[82] G. Vandersteen. Identification of linear and nonlinear systems in an errors-in-variables
least squares and total least squares framework. PhD Thesis, Vrije Universiteit Brussel,
1997.
[83] E. W. Weisstein. Multinomial Series. From MathWorld - A Wolfram Web Resource.
http://mathworld.wolfram.com/MultinomialSeries.html
[84] P. D. Welch. The use of fast Fourier transforms for the estimation of power spectra: A
method based on time averaging over short, modified periodograms. IEEE Transactions
on Audio and Electroacoustics, vol. 15, no. 2, pp. 70-73, 1967.
[85] E. Wernholt, S. Gunnarsson. Detection and Estimation of Nonlinear Distortions in
Industrial Robots. Proceedings of the IEEE Instrumentation and Measurement
Technology Conference, Sorrento, Italy, pp. 1913-1918, 24-27 April 2006.
[86] A. G. Wills, B. Ninness. On Gradient-Based Search for Multivariable System Estimates.
IEEE Transactions on Automatic Control, vol. 52, no. 12, pp. 1-8, 2007.
[87] http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/KISS_principle
[88] http://lame.sourceforge.net
![Page 220: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/220.jpg)
204
PUBLICATION LIST
Journal papers
• J. Paduart, J. Schoukens, Y. Rolain. Fast Measurement of Quantization Distortions in DSP
Algorithms. IEEE Transactions on Instrumentation and Measurement, vol. 56, no. 5,
pp. 1917-1923, 2007.
Conference papers
• J. Paduart, J. Schoukens. Fast Identification of systems with nonlinear feedback.
Proceedings of the 6th IFAC Symposium on Nonlinear Control Systems, Stuttgart, Germany,
pp. 525-529, 2004.
• J. Paduart, J. Schoukens, L. Gommé. On the Equivalence between some Block-oriented
Nonlinear Models and the Nonlinear Polynomial State Space Model. Proceedings of the
IEEE Instrumentation and Measurement Technology Conference, Warsaw, Poland, pp. 1-6,
2007.
• J. Paduart, J. Schoukens, R. Pintelon, T. Coen. Nonlinear State Space Modelling of
Multivariable Systems. Proceedings of the 14th IFAC Symposium on System Identification,
Newcastle, Australia, pp. 565-569, 2006.
• J. Paduart, J. Schoukens, K. Smolders, J. Swevers. Comparison of two different
nonlinear state-space identification algorithms. Proceedings of the International Conference
on Noise and Vibration Engineering, Leuven, Belgium, pp. 2777-2784, 2006.
• J. Schoukens, J. Swevers, J. Paduart, D. Vaes, K. Smolders, R. Pintelon. Initial estimates
for block structured nonlinear systems with feedback. Proceedings of the International
Symposium on Nonlinear Theory and its Applications, Brugge, Belgium, pp. 622-625, 2005.
![Page 221: Identification of Nonlinear Systems using Polynomial ... · 2.4.1 Response to a Sine Wave 25 2.4.2 Even and Odd Nonlinear Behaviour 25 2.4.3 The Multisine as a Detection Tool for](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050602/5fa96b0fb513023a9d0f002e/html5/thumbnails/221.jpg)
205
• J. Schoukens, R. Pintelon, J. Paduart, G. Vandersteen. Nonparametric Initial Estimates
for Wiener-Hammerstein systems. Proceedings of the 14th IFAC Symposium on System
Identification, Newcastle, Australia, pp. 778-783, 2006.
• T. Coen, J. Paduart, J. Anthonis, J. Schoukens, J. De Baerdemaeker. Nonlinear system
identification on a combine harvester. Proceedings of the American Control Conference,
Minneapolis, Minnesota, USA, pp. 3074-3079, 2006.